Pontiac Firebird 2000 Owner's Manual

Add to My manuals
360 Pages

advertisement

Pontiac Firebird 2000 Owner's Manual | Manualzz

Bumper-to-Bumper

3-years/36,000 miles (60 000 km)

Limited Warranty

Every

2000 Firebird under warranty is backed with the following services:

Courtesy

Transportation

( (

For vehicles purchased in Canada,

that provides in an emergency:

Free

lockout assistance

Free

dead-battery assistance

Free

out-of-fuel assistance

Free

flat-tire change

Emergency towing

2000 Pontiac Firebird

Owner's Manual

Litho in U.S.A.

Part Number 10410956 A First Edition

© Copyright General Motors Corporation 1999

All Rights Reserved

i

ii

Section 1

Section 2

Table of Contents

Seats and Restraint Systems

Air Bag System

Child Restraints

Seats and Seat Controls

Safety Belts

Features and Controls

Keys and Door Locks

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System

Hatch

Automatic Transmission (If Equipped)

Manual Transmission Operation (If Equipped)

Parking Brake

Windows

Tilt Wheel

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

Windshield Wipers

Cruise Control

Interior and Exterior Lamps

Mirrors

Storage Compartments

Cargo Cover

Accessory Power Outlet

Instrument Panel, Warning Lights and Gages

Section 3

Section 4

Section

5

Table of Contents (cont'd)

Comfort Controls and Audio Systems

Heating and Air Conditioning

Setting the Radio Clock

Radio/Cassette Player/CD Player

Radio Theft-Deterrent Feature

Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped)

Your Driving and the Road

Braking/Anti-lock Brakes (If Equipped)

Traction Control System

Steering

Driving Tips for Various Road Conditions

Recreational Vehicle Towing

Loading Your Vehicle

Towing a Trailer

Hazard Warning Flashers

Jump Starting

Towing Your Vehicle

Problems on the Road

Engine Overheating

Changing a Flat Tire

If You're Stuck

iii

iv

Section 6

Table of Contents (cont'd)

Fuel

Checking Fluids and Lubricants

GM Oil Life System™

Bulb Replacement

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement

Service and Appearance Care

Tires and Wheels

Appearance Care

Electrical System/Fuses and Circuit Breakers

Capacities and Specifications

Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts

Section 7

Scheduled Maintenance

Periodic Maintenance Inspections

Maintenance Schedule

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

Maintenance Records

Section 8

Table of Contents (cont'd)

Customer Assistance Information

Customer Satisfaction Procedures

Customer Assistance Offices

Roadside Assistance and Courtesy Transportation

Warranty Information (See Warranty Manual)

Reporting Safety Defects on page 8-10

Service Publications

Section 9

Index

In the Index you will find an alphabetical listing of almost every subject in this manual.

You can use it to quickly find something you want to read.

Please refer to the last page of this manual for your

Service Station Guide

v

We support voluntary technician certification.

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,

PONTIAC, the PONTIAC Emblem and the name

FIREBIRD are registered trademarks of General

Motors Corporation.

This manual includes the latest information at the time it was printed. We reserve the right to make changes in the product after that time without further notice. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name

“General Motors of Canada Limited” for Pontiac

Division whenever it appears in this manual.

Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will be there if you ever need it when you’re on the road. If you sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it so the new owner can use it.

For Canadian Owners Who Prefer a

French Language Manual:

Aux propriétaires canadiens: Vous pouvez vous procurer un exemplaire de ce guide en français chez votre concessionaire ou au:

DGN Marketing Services Ltd.

1577 Meyerside Dr.

Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1B9

vi

How to Use this Manual

Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning to end when they first receive their new vehicle. If you do this, it will help you learn about the features and controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find that pictures and words work together to explain things quickly.

Safety Warnings and Symbols

You will find a number of safety cautions in this book.

We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning.

CAUTION:

These mean there is something that could hurt you or other people.

In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is. Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you or others could be hurt.

You will also find a circle with a slash through it in this book. This safety symbol means “Don’t,”

“Don’t do this” or “Don’t let this happen.”

vii

Vehicle Damage Warnings

Also, in this book you will find these notices:

NOTICE:

These mean there is something that could damage your vehicle.

In the notice area, we tell you about something that can damage your vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered by your warranty, and it could be costly.

But the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid the damage.

When you read other manuals, you might see CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different words.

You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

viii

Vehicle Symbols

These are some of the symbols you may find on your vehicle.

For example, these symbols are used on an original battery:

CAUTION

POSSIBLE

INJURY

These symbols are important for you and your passengers whenever your vehicle is driven:

These symbols have to do with your lamps:

MASTER

LIGHTING

SWITCH

These symbols are on some of your controls:

WINDSHIELD

WIPER

PROTECT

EYES BY

SHIELDING

DOOR LOCK

UNLOCK

TURN

SIGNALS

WINDSHIELD

WASHER

PARKING

LAMPS CAUSTIC

BATTERY

ACID COULD

CAUSE

BURNS

FASTEN

SEAT

BELTS

HAZARD

WARNING

FLASHER

WINDSHIELD

DEFROSTER

AVOID

SPARKS OR

FLAMES

POWER

WINDOW

DAYTIME

RUNNING

LAMPS

REAR

WINDOW

DEFOGGER

SPARK OR

FLAME

COULD

EXPLODE

BATTERY

AIR BAG FOG LAMPS

VENTILATING

FAN

These symbols are used on warning and indicator lights:

ENGINE

COOLANT

TEMP

BATTERY

CHARGING

SYSTEM

BRAKE

COOLANT

ENGINE OIL

PRESSURE

ANTI-LOCK

BRAKES

Here are some other symbols you may see:

FUSE

LIGHTER

HORN

SPEAKER

FUEL

ix

Service Station Guide

Windshield Washer

Fluid

See Section 6

For

Battery a More

See Section 6

Detailed Look at

What's Under the Hood

See Section 6

Cooling System

See Section 5

Tire Pressure

See Section 6

Spare Tire Pressure

See Section 5

V8 Engine Oil

Dipstick

See Section 6

Hood Release

See Section 6

V6 Engine Oil

Dipstick

See Section 6

Oil Viscosity

Engine Oil

See Section 6

Premium Fuel Recommended

Use unleaded gas only,

91 Octane or higher.

See Section 6

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

Here you’ll find information about the seats in your vehicle and how to use your safety belts properly. You can also learn about some things you should not do with air bags and safety belts.

1

-

2 Seats and Seat Controls

1

-

7 Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone

1

-

12 Here Are Questions Many People Ask About

Safety Belts

--

and the Answers

1

-

13 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly

1

-

13 Driver

1

-

20 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy

1

-

21 Right Front Passenger Position

1

-

21 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

1

-

28 Rear Seat Passengers

1

-

31 Children

1

-

34 Child Restraints

1

-

45 Larger

1

-

48 Safety Belt Extender

1

-

48 Checking Your Restraint Systems

1

-

48 Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash

1-

1-1

Seats and Seat Controls

This section tells you about the seats

--

how to adjust them and also about reclining front seatbacks, seatback latches and the folding rear seatback.

Manual Front Seats

CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is moving. The sudden movement could startle and confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you don’t want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when the vehicle is not moving.

Move the lever located under the front seat to unlock it.

Slide the seat to where you want it. Then release the lever and try to move the seat with your body to make sure the seat is locked into place. Be sure the lever returns to its original position after moving the seat.

1-2

4-Way Manual Seats 6-Way Power Seat (If Equipped)

There are two levers located at the front of the seat.

The left lever adjusts the seat forward and rearward.

The right lever adjusts the angle of the front of the seat.

To adjust the seats forward and rearward, lift the lever under the left front of the seat. Slide the seat to where you want it. Then release the lever and try to move the seat with your body to make sure the seat is locked into place.

To raise or lower the seat, lift the lever under the right front of the seat and lean forward or backward.

The driver’s seat has three power seat controls located on the left side.

A: The front control makes the front of the seat go up and down.

B: The center control makes the whole seat go up and down or forward and backward.

C: The back control makes the rear of the seat go up and down.

1-3

In addition to the power seat control, there are two other switches located on the side of the seat that help you change the shape of your seat.

Reclining Front Seatbacks

There is one lumbar support (the front switch) for the lower back. There is also a side bolster switch (the rear switch) that adjusts the sides of the seat around you to give you lateral support.

For lumbar support, push the front switch down to inflate and up to deflate.

For lateral support, push the rear switch down to inflate and up to deflate.

To adjust the seatback, lift the lever on the outer side of the seat. Release the lever to lock the seatback where you want it. Pull up on the lever and the seat will go to its original upright position.

1-4

But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving.

CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle up, your safety belts can’t do their job when you’re reclined like this.

The shoulder belt can’t do its job. In a crash you could go into it, receiving neck or other injuries.

The lap belt can’t do its job either. In a crash the belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.

This could cause serious internal injuries.

For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly.

1-5

Head Restraints

Head restraints are fixed on some models and adjustable on others. Slide an adjustable head restraint up or down so that the top of the restraint is closest to the top of your ears. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.

Front Seatback Latches

The front seatbacks fold forward to let people get into the back seat. To fold a seatback forward, lift the latch located on the lower backside of the seatback.

When you return the seatback to its original position, make sure the seatback is locked. The latch must be down for the seat to work properly.

CAUTION:

If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is locked.

1-6

Folding Rear Seatback

The rear seatback in your vehicle folds down to provide more storage space.

To fold the seatback down:

1. Pull forward on both levers.

2. Fold the seatback down.

To raise the seatback:

1. Lift the seatback to its locked, upright position.

2. Be sure both latches hold the seatback in place. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked.

Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone

This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts properly. It also tells you some things you should not do with safety belts.

And it explains the Supplemental Restraint System

(SRS), or air bag system.

CAUTION:

Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’t wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a crash and you’re not wearing a safety belt, your injuries can be much worse. You can hit things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you might not be if you are buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt, and check that your passengers’ belts are fastened properly too.

1-7

CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly.

In most states and Canadian provinces, the law says to wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.

You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have a crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so serious that even buckled up a person wouldn’t survive.

But most crashes are in between. In many of them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt or killed.

After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does matter ... a lot!

Your vehicle has a light that comes on as a reminder to buckle up. (See “Safety Belt

Reminder Light” in the Index.)

1-8

Why Safety Belts Work

When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat on wheels.

Put someone on it.

1-9

Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider doesn’t stop.

The person keeps going until stopped by something.

In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield ...

1-10

or the instrument panel ...

or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.

You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance, and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why safety belts make such good sense.

1-11

Here Are Questions Many People Ask

About Safety Belts

--

and the Answers

Q:

Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?

A:

You could be

--

whether you’re wearing a safety belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you’re upside down. And your chance of being conscious during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if you are belted.

Q:

If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have to wear safety belts?

A:

Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in most of them in the future. But they are supplemental systems only; so they work with safety belts

--

not instead of them. Every air bag system ever offered for sale has required the use of safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that has air bags, you still have to buckle up to get the most protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions, but especially in side and other collisions.

Q:

If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from home, why should I wear safety belts?

A:

You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an accident

--

even one that isn’t your fault

--

you and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good driver doesn’t protect you from things beyond your control, such as bad drivers.

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of home. And the greatest number of serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than

40 mph (65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

1-12

How to Wear Safety Belts Properly

Adults

This part is only for people of adult size.

Be aware that there are special things to know about safety belts and children. And there are different rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be riding in your vehicle, see the part of this manual called “Children.”

Follow those rules for everyone’s protection.

First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your vehicle has.

We’ll start with the driver position.

Driver Position

This part describes the driver’s restraint system.

Lap-Shoulder Belt

The driver has a lap

shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear it properly.

1. Close and lock the door.

2. Adjust the seat (to see how, see “Seats” in the Index) so you can sit up straight.

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.

Don’t let it get twisted.

On convertible models, the shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.

Then pull the belt across you more slowly.

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.

1-13

If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, tilt the latch plate and keep pulling until you can buckle the belt.

Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.

If the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt

Extender” at the end of this section.

Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

1-14

5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.

The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest.

These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or crash.

On convertible models, the safety belt also locks if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.

1-15

Q:

What’s wrong with this?

CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too much, which could increase injury. The shoulder belt should fit against your body.

A:

The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearly as much protection this way.

1-16

Q:

What’s wrong with this?

CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries.

Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.

A:

The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

1-17

Q:

What’s wrong with this?

A:

The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should be worn over the shoulder at all times.

1-18

CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wear the shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your body would move too far forward, which would increase the chance of head and neck injury.

Also, the belt would apply too much force to the ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.

You could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen.

Q:

What’s wrong with this?

CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make it straight so it can work properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.

A:

The belt is twisted across the body.

1-19

Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy

Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts.

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.

The belt should go back out of the way.

Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both the belt and your vehicle.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap

shoulder belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.

1-20

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly.

Right Front Passenger Position

The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same way as the driver’s safety belt. See “Driver Position” earlier in this section.

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

This part explains the Supplemental Restraint System

(SRS) or air bag system.

Your vehicle has air bags

--

one air bag for the driver and another air bag for the right front passenger.

Frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk of injury from the force of an inflating air bag. But these air bags must inflate very quickly to do their job and comply with federal regulations.

Here are the most important things to know about the air bag system:

CAUTION:

You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if you aren’t wearing your safety belt

--

even if you have air bags. Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it. Air bags are “supplemental restraints” to the safety belts. All air bags are designed to work with safety belts, but don’t replace them. Air bags are designed to work only in moderate to severe crashes where the front of your vehicle hits something. They aren’t designed to inflate at all in rollover, rear, side or low

speed frontal crashes. And, for unrestrained occupants, air bags may provide less protection in frontal crashes than more forceful air bags have provided in the past. Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt properly

--

whether or not there’s an air bag for that person.

1-21

CAUTION:

Air bags inflate with great force, faster than the blink of an eye. If you’re too close to an inflating air bag, as you would be if you were leaning forward, it could seriously injure you. Safety belts help keep you in position before and during a crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with air bags. The driver should sit as far back as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle.

CAUTION:

Anyone who is up against, or very close to, any air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Air bags plus lap

shoulder belts offer the best protection for adults, but not for young children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its air bag system is designed for them. Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide. Always secure children properly in your vehicle. To read how, see the part of this manual called “Children.”

1-22

How the Air Bag System Works

United States Canada

There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument panel, which shows AIR BAG or the air bag symbol.

The system checks the air bag electrical system for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. See “Air Bag Readiness Light” in the Index for more information.

Where are the air bags?

The driver’s air bag is in the middle of the steering wheel.

1-23

The right front passenger’s air bag is in the instrument panel on the passenger’s side.

CAUTION:

If something is between an occupant and an air bag, the bag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that person. The path of an inflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’t put anything between an occupant and an air bag, and don’t attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other air bag covering.

1-24

When should an air bag inflate?

An air bag is designed to inflate in a moderate to severe frontal or near

frontal crash. The air bag will inflate only if the impact speed is above the system’s designed

“threshold level.” If your vehicle goes straight into a wall that doesn’t move or deform, the threshold level is about 12 to 18 mph (19 to 29 km/h). The threshold level can vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so that it can be somewhat above or below this range. If your vehicle strikes something that will move or deform, such as a parked car, the threshold level will be higher. The air bag is not designed to inflate in rollovers, side impacts or rear impacts, because inflation would not help the occupant.

In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air bag should have inflated simply because of the damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.

Inflation is determined by the angle of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal or near

frontal impacts.

What makes an air bag inflate?

In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. The sensing system triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which inflates the air bag. The inflator, air bag and related hardware are all part of the air bag modules inside the steering wheel and in the instrument panel in front of the right front passenger.

How does an air bag restrain?

In moderate to severe frontal or near

frontal collisions, even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the instrument panel. Air bags supplement the protection provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But air bags would not help you in many types of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts and side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward those air bags. Air bags should never be regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety belts, and then only in moderate to severe frontal or near

frontal collisions.

1-25

What will you see after an air bag inflates?

After an air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly that some people may not even realize the air bag inflated.

Some components of the air bag module

--

the steering wheel hub for the driver’s air bag, or the instrument panel for the right front passenger’s bag

--

will be hot for a short time. The parts of the bag that come into contact with you may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There will be some smoke and dust coming from vents in the deflated air bags. Air bag inflation doesn’t prevent the driver from seeing or from being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle.

CAUTION:

When an air bag inflates, there is dust in the air.

This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so.

If you have breathing problems but can’t get out of the vehicle after an air bag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window or door.

In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag, windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.

Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the right front passenger air bag.

D Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After they inflate, you’ll need some new parts for your air bag system. If you don’t get them, the air bag system won’t be there to help protect you in another crash.

A new system will include air bag modules and possibly other parts. The service manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.

D Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic module, which records information about the air bag system. The module records information about the readiness of the system, when the system commands air bag inflation and driver’s safety belt usage at deployment. Some modules also record speed, engine rpm, brake and throttle data.

D Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag system. Improper service can mean that your air bag system won’t work properly. See your dealer for service.

1-26

NOTICE:

If you damage the covering for the driver’s or the right front passenger’s air bag, the bag may not work properly. You may have to replace the air bag module in the steering wheel or both the air bag module and the instrument panel for the right front passenger’s air bag. Do not open or break the air bag coverings.

Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle

Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.

There are parts of the air bag system in several places around your vehicle. You don’t want the system to inflate while someone is working on your vehicle. Your dealer and the service manual have information about servicing your vehicle and the air bag system. To purchase a service manual, see “Service and Owner

Publications” in the Index.

CAUTION:

For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key is turned off and the battery is disconnected, an air bag can still inflate during improper service. You can be injured if you are close to an air bag when it inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. They are probably part of the air bag system. Be sure to follow proper service procedures, and make sure the person performing work for you is qualified to do so.

The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.

1-27

Rear Seat Passengers

It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up!

Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.

Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.

Lap

-

Shoulder Belt

The rear seats have lap

shoulder belts. Here’s how to wear one properly.

1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.

Don’t let it get twisted.

On convertible models, the shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.

Then pull the belt across you more slowly.

2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.

1-28

If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, tilt the latch plate and keep pulling until you can buckle it.

Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.

If the belt is not long enough, see “Safety Belt

Extender” at the end of this section. Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.

1-29

The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.

1-30

The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or a crash.

On convertible models, the safety belt also locks if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.

CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too much, which could increase injury. The shoulder belt should fit against your body.

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.

Children

Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! That includes infants and all children smaller than adult size. Neither the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints.

In fact, the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle.

Smaller Children and Babies

CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or very close to, any air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Air bags plus lap

shoulder belts offer the best protection for adults, but not for young children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its air bag system is designed for them. Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide.

Always secure children properly in your vehicle.

1-31

CAUTION:

Smaller children and babies should always be restrained in a child or infant restraint. The instructions for the restraint will say whether it is the right type and size for your child. A very young child’s hip bones are so small that a regular belt might not stay low on the hips, as it should. Instead, the belt will likely be over the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt would apply force right on the child’s abdomen, which could cause serious or fatal injuries. So, be sure that any child small enough for one is always properly restrained in a child or infant restraint.

Infants need complete support, including support for the head and neck. This is necessary because an infant’s neck is weak and its head weighs so much compared with the rest of its body. In a frontal crash, an infant in a rear

facing restraint settles into the restraint, so the crash forces can be distributed across the strongest part of the infant’s body, the back and shoulders. A baby should be secured in an appropriate infant restraint. This is so important that many hospitals today won’t release a newborn infant to its parents unless there is an infant restraint available for the baby’s first trip in a motor vehicle.

1-32

CAUTION:

Never hold a baby in your arms while riding in a vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh much

--

until a crash. During a crash a baby will become so heavy you can’t hold it. For example, in a crash

CAUTION: (Continued)

CAUTION: (Continued) at only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12

lb. (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly become a 240

lb. (110 kg) force on your arms. The baby would be almost impossible to hold.

Secure the baby in an infant restraint.

1-33

Child Restraints

Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles, they should have protection provided by appropriate restraints.

Q:

What are the different types of add

on child restraints?

A:

Add

on child restraints are available in four basic types. When selecting a child restraint, take into consideration not only the child’s weight and size, but also whether or not the restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will be used.

An infant car bed (A) is a special bed made for use in a motor vehicle. It’s an infant restraint system designed to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat surface. With an infant car bed, make sure that the infant’s head rests toward the center of the vehicle.

1-34

A rear

facing infant restraint (B) positions an infant to face the rear of the vehicle. Rear

facing infant restraints are designed for infants of up to about

20 lbs. (9 kg) and about one year of age. This type of restraint faces the rear so that the infant’s head, neck and body can have the support they need in a frontal crash. Some infant seats come in two parts

--

the base stays secured in the vehicle and the seat part is removable.

1-35

1-36

A forward

facing child restraint (C

-

E) positions a child upright to face forward in the vehicle.

These forward

facing restraints are designed to help protect children who are from 20 to 40 lbs.

(9 to 18 kg) and about 26 to 40 inches

(66 to 102 cm) in height, or up to around four years of age. One type, a convertible restraint, is designed to be used either as a rear

facing infant seat or a forward

facing child seat.

A booster seat (F) is designed for children who are about 40 to 60 lbs., or even up to 80 lbs.

(18 to 27 kg, or even up to 36 kg), and about four to eight years of age. A booster seat is designed to improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.

Booster seats with shields use lap

only belts; however, booster seats without shields use lap

shoulder belts. Booster seats can also help a child to see out the window.

When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards.

Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system in your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured within the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury.

The instructions that come with the infant or child restraint will show you how to do that. Both the owner’s manual and the child restraint instructions are important, so if either one of these is not available, obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer.

1-37

Where to Put the Restraint

Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We at

General Motors therefore recommend that you put your child restraint in the rear seat. Never put a rear

facing child restraint in the front passenger seat. Here’s why:

CAUTION:

A child in a rear

facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because the back of the rear

facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating air bag. Always secure a rear

facing child restraint in a rear seat.

CAUTION: (Continued)

CAUTION: (Continued)

You may secure a forward

facing child restraint in the right front seat, but before you do, always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go. It’s better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.

Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child restraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in your vehicle

--

even when no child is in it.

1-38

Top Strap

If your vehicle is not a convertible, two top strap anchors are already installed for the rear seating positions. You’ll find the anchors behind the rear seat, on the floor in the cargo area.

In Canada, the law requires that forward

facing child restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be anchored.

In the United States, some child restraints also have a top strap. If your child restraint has a top strap, it should be anchored.

If your vehicle is a convertible, don’t use a top strap child restraint in it because the anchor can’t be installed properly.

Anchor the top strap to this bracket. Once you have the top strap anchored, you’ll be ready to secure the child restraint itself.

1-39

Securing a Child Restraint in a

Rear Seat Position

You’ll be using the lap

shoulder belt. See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one.

Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say.

1. Put the restraint on the seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how.

Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed.

If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face or neck, put it behind the child restraint.

1-40

3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

4. To tighten the belt, pull up on the shoulder belt while you push down on the child restraint. If you’re using a forward

facing child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.

5. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure.

1-41

To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger.

Securing a Child Restraint in the Right

Front Seat Position

CAUTION:

A child in a rear

facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because the back of the rear

facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating air bag. Always secure a rear

facing child restraint in the rear seat.

Although a rear seat is a safer place, you can secure a forward

facing child restraint in the right front seat.

Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag. Never put a rear

facing child restraint in this seat. Here’s why:

1-42

You’ll be using the lap

shoulder belt. See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say.

1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag, always move the seat as far back as it will go before securing a forward

facing child restraint.

(See “Seats” in the Index.)

2. Put the restraint on the seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how.

Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed.

If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face or neck, put it behind the child restraint.

1-43

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. To tighten the belt, pull up on the shoulder belt while you push down on the child restraint. You may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.

6. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure.

To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger.

1-44

Larger Children

Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear seat. But they need to use the safety belts properly.

D Children who aren’t buckled up can be thrown out in a crash.

D Children who aren’t buckled up can strike other people who are.

Children who have outgrown child restraints should wear the vehicle’s safety belts.

1-45

1-46

CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here two children are wearing the same belt. The belt can’t properly spread the impact forces. In a crash, the two children can be crushed together and seriously injured. A belt must be used by only one person at a time.

Q:

What if a child is wearing a lap

shoulder belt, but the child is so small that the shoulder belt is very close to the child’s face or neck?

A:

Move the child toward the center of the vehicle, but be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper body would have the restraint that belts provide.

CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a lap

shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is behind the child. If the child wears the belt in this way, in a crash the child might slide under the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal injuries.

Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.

1-47

Safety Belt Extender

If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you go in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the extender will be long enough for you. The extender will be just for you, and just for the seat in your vehicle that you choose. Don’t let someone else use it, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear it, just attach it to the regular safety belt.

Checking Your Restraint Systems

Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have it repaired.

Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.

If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.

Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.)

1-48

Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash

If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts?

After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.

But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if worn during a more severe crash, then you need new belts.

If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision damage also may mean you will need to have safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced. New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt wasn’t being used at the time of the collision.

If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag system parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier in this section.

Section 2 Features and Controls

Here you can learn about the many standard and optional features on your vehicle, and information on starting, shifting and braking. Also explained are the instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you if everything is working properly

--

and what to do if you have a problem.

2

-

2

2

-

4

2

Keys

Door Locks

2

2

-

6 Keyless Entry System (If Equipped)

-

11 Hatch

2

-

12 Theft

2

-

14 Content Theft

-

Deterrent/Alarm

2

-

17

System (Option)

PASS

-

Key

R

II

2

-

25 New Vehicle “Break

-

In”

2

-

25 Ignition Positions

2

-

27 Starting Your Engine

2

-

30 Engine Coolant Heater (Canada Only)

2

-

32 Automatic Transmission Operation

2

-

35 Manual Transmission Operation

2

-

39 Parking Brake

2

-

40 Shifting Into PARK (P)

(Automatic Transmission Only)

-

42 Shifting Out of PARK (P)

(Automatic Transmission)

2-

2

-

42 Parking Your Vehicle (Manual Transmission)

2

-

43 Parking Over Things That Burn

2

-

43 Engine Exhaust

2

-

44 Running Your Engine While You’re Parked

2

2

(Automatic Transmission)

-

44 Limited

-

Slip Rear Axle

2

-

45 Windows

-

46 Tilt Wheel

2

-

46 Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

2

-

51 Exterior Lamps

2

-

54 Interior Lamps

2

-

56 Mirrors

2

-

57 Storage Compartments

2

-

61 T

-

Top Roof Panels (If Equipped)

2

-

68 Convertible Top (If Equipped)

2

-

76 The Instrument Panel

--

Your

2

Information System

-

80 Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators

2-1

Keys

CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons. A child or others could be badly injured or even killed.

They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move. Don’t leave the keys in a vehicle with children.

2-2

This key is for the ignition only.

This key is for the doors and all other locks.

When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer removes the bar

coded plugs from the door keys and gives them to the first owner.

However, the ignition keys don’t have plugs. Instead, they have bar

coded key tags. These tags may be removed by your dealer or even before the vehicle is delivered to your dealer.

Each door key plug has a code on it that tells your dealer or a qualified locksmith how to make extra door keys.

Keep the plugs in a safe place. If you lose your door keys, you’ll be able to have new ones made using these plugs.

If you need a new ignition key, contact your dealer who can obtain the correct key code. Remember to carry the pre

cut emergency key that Pontiac sends after delivery

(this service is not available in Canada). In an emergency, call Pontiac Roadside Assistance at 1

-

800

-

ROADSIDE or

1

-

800

-

762

-

3743. (In Canada call 1

-

800

-

268

-

6800.)

NOTICE:

Your vehicle has a number of new features that can help prevent theft. But you can have a lot of trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever lock your keys inside. You may even have to damage your vehicle to get in. So be sure you have extra keys.

2-3

Door Locks

CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.

Passengers

--

especially children

--

can easily open the doors and fall out. When a door is locked, the inside handle won’t open it.

Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked door when you slow down or stop your vehicle.

This may not be so obvious: You increase the chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if the doors aren’t locked. Wear safety belts properly, lock your doors, and you will be far better off whenever you drive your vehicle.

There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.

From the outside, use your door key. If your vehicle has the content theft

deterrent/alarm system and it is armed, unlocking and opening a door this way will set off the alarm after eight seconds unless the ignition key is inserted into the ignition. See “Content

Theft

-

Deterrent/Alarm System” in the Index.

2-4

To lock the door from the inside, slide the lock control located on the door rearward.

To unlock the door, slide the lock control located on the door forward.

Power Door Locks (If Equipped)

Press the power door lock switch located on the driver’s door to lock or unlock both doors at once.

The power door lock switch works at all times, except when lockout prevention (if equipped) is programmed.

The unlock switch only works when the ignition is in

RUN, ACC or Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active. (See “Retained Accessory Power” in the Index.)

Operating the power door locks may affect the content theft

deterrent/alarm system (if equipped). See “Content

Theft

-

Deterrent/Alarm System” in the Index.

Last Door Closed Locking (If Equipped)

If you have power door locks, you can program your vehicle to delay the locking of the doors. This lets you and your passengers exit the vehicle after you’ve pressed the power door lock switch. All of the doors will lock once everyone has gotten out of the vehicle and the doors are closed.

When the power door lock switch is pressed, a chime will sound three times, indicating that the last door closed locking feature has been activated. Pressing the power door lock switch again will lock the doors immediately. Pressing the unlock switch will cancel a previously requested last door closed locking.

The vehicle is shipped from the factory with this feature turned off. To turn this feature on, see “Feature

Customization” in the Index.

2-5

Lockout Prevention (If Equipped)

To protect you from locking your keys in the vehicle, this feature stops the power door locks from locking when the keys are in the ignition and a door is open. If the power lock switch is pressed when a door is open, a chime will sound five times as a reminder to take the keys out of the ignition before locking the door.

The vehicle is shipped from the factory with this feature turned on. If you would like to turn this feature off, see

“Feature Customization” in the Index.

Leaving Your Vehicle

If you are leaving the vehicle, take your keys, open your door and set the locks from inside. Then get out and close the door.

Keyless Entry System (If Equipped)

If your vehicle has this feature, you can lock and unlock your doors or unlock your trunk from about 3 feet (1 m) up to 30 feet (9 m) away using the remote keyless entry transmitter supplied with your vehicle.

Your keyless entry system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC)

Rules and with Industry Canada.

2-6

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

This device complies with RSS

-

210 of Industry Canada.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment.

At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:

D Check the distance. You may be too far from your vehicle. You may need to stand closer during rainy or snowy weather.

D Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.

D Check to determine if battery replacement is necessary. See the instructions that follow.

D If you’re still having trouble, see your dealer or a qualified technician for service.

2-7

Operation

The driver’s door will unlock automatically when

UNLOCK is pressed on the transmitter. If UNLOCK is pressed again within five seconds, the passenger’s door will also unlock. All doors will lock when LOCK is pressed.

The hatch will unlock when the REAR 2X button on the transmitter is pressed twice within five seconds (pause slightly between presses) and as long as the ignition is turned to OFF. If the ignition is on, the REAR 2X button will only work if the transmission is in PARK (P) for an automatic transmission, or if the parking brake is set on a manual transmission.

The system will turn on the interior lamps for about

40 seconds (or until the ignition is turned to RUN), when you unlock the doors or hatch. The interior lamps will go off when you lock the doors.

Operating the remote keyless entry transmitter may interact with the content theft

deterrent/alarm system

(if equipped). See “Content Theft

-

Deterrent/Alarm

System” in the Index.

Alarm/Panic Mode

If you are involved in a panic situation, press the horn symbol button on your remote keyless entry transmitter and the horn will sound and the parking lamps will flash. This will draw needed attention to you and your vehicle. To turn this feature off, either push the horn symbol button again or turn the ignition key to RUN.

This feature will not work if your ignition is on or if the transmitter is 30 feet (9 m) or more away from your vehicle.

Transmitter Verification (If Equipped)

This feature provides feedback to the holder of the remote keyless entry transmitter that a command has been received by the keyless entry receiver. The parking lamps will flash on every lock and unlock command and the horn will sound only if the LOCK button is pressed twice within five seconds. This allows for silent operation of locking and unlocking, unless a confirming horn chirp is desired. Other options may be selected for this feature (see “Feature Customization” in the Index).

2-8

Matching Transmitter(s) To Your Vehicle

Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.

If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring any remaining transmitters with you when you go to your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle. Each vehicle can have only four transmitters matched to it.

Have each transmitter you intend to match ready for the next steps. To match transmitters to your vehicle, do the following:

1. Turn the ignition key to RUN, then to OFF. This will disarm the content theft

deterrent/alarm system

(if equipped).

2. Remove the RADIO fuse. This fuse is located in the main fuse block which is located on the left side of your instrument panel. The radio fuse is on the lower right

hand corner of your instrument panel. See

“Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index.

3. Turn the ignition key from OFF to RUN three times quickly (within five seconds). The vehicle will respond by locking the doors, unlocking the driver’s door and releasing the hatch. Your transmitter is now ready to match the vehicle. Leave the ignition in RUN.

4. Press and hold the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the first transmitter for 15 seconds. The vehicle will respond as in Step 3.

5. Repeat Step 4 for the remaining transmitters.

6. When you have finished matching all of your transmitters, replace the RADIO fuse.

7. Check that all transmitters work by pressing the buttons.

If the transmitters don’t work, or if you’d rather not match the transmitters yourself, see your dealer.

2-9

Battery Replacement

Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless entry transmitter should last about two years.

You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t work at the normal range in any location. If you have to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works, it’s probably time to change the battery.

NOTICE:

When replacing the battery, use care not to touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body transferred to these surfaces may damage the transmitter.

To replace the battery in the remote keyless entry transmitter, do the following:

1. Carefully pry off the cover by inserting a dime

(or similar object) in the slot between the covers and twist.

2. Lift off the back cover.

3. Remove and replace the battery. Use one battery, type CR2032, or a similar type. Put the new battery in printed side down.

4. Put the back cover on. Make sure the cover is on tight so water won’t get in.

5. Check the transmitter operation. If the transmitter does not work after battery replacement, it may need to be resynchronized or matched to your vehicle. See

“Resynchronization” following.

2-10

Resynchronization

Resynchronization may be necessary due to the security method used by the remote keyless entry system. The transmitter does not send the same signal twice to the receiver. The receiver will not respond to a signal that has been sent previously. This prevents anyone from recording and playing back the signal from the transmitter.

To resynchronize the transmitter with the receiver, do the following:

1. Stand close to the vehicle.

2. Press and hold the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the transmitter at the same time for about eight seconds.

The door locks should cycle and the interior lamps should flash to confirm resynchronization.

If this does not happen, you may need to replace the battery in your transmitter or match the transmitter to your vehicle. See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your

Vehicle” in the Index.

Hatch

CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to drive with the hatch open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can come into your vehicle. You can’t see or smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and even death.

If you must drive with the hatch open or if electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass through the seal between the body and the hatch:

D Make sure all other windows are shut.

D Turn the fan on your heating or cooling

system to its highest speed with the setting on VENT. That will force outside air into your vehicle. See “Comfort Controls” in the Index.

D If you have air outlets on or under the

instrument panel, open them all the way.

See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.

2-11

Hatch Release

Your door key opens the hatch from the outside. If your vehicle has the content theft

deterrent/alarm system and the system is armed, opening the hatch this way will trigger the alarm. First disarm the system or use the remote keyless entry transmitter to open the hatch. See

“Content Theft

-

Deterrent/Alarm System” in the Index.

Remote Hatch Release

Press the button located under the lamp control on the driver’s side below the instrument panel to unlock the hatch from inside your vehicle.

If you have an automatic transmission, the shift lever must be in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) to use the remote hatch release. If you have a manual transmission and the ignition is in RUN, you must set the parking brake before you can use the remote hatch release.

This button only works when the ignition is in RUN,

ACC or when RAP is present. (See “Retained Accessory

Power” in the Index.)

NOTICE:

If you put things in the hatchback area, be sure they won’t break the glass when you close it.

Never slam the hatch down. You could break the glass or damage the defogger grid (if equipped).

On vehicles with the content theft

deterrent/alarm system, the remote hatch release button will not work while the system is armed. See “Content

Theft

-

Deterrent/Alarm System” in the Index.

Theft

Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.

Although your vehicle has a number of theft

deterrent features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it impossible to steal. However, there are ways you can help.

2-12

Key in the Ignition

If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside, it’s an easy target for joy riders or professional thieves

--

so don’t do it.

When you park your vehicle and open the driver’s door, you’ll hear a chime reminding you to remove your key from the ignition and take it with you. Always do this.

Your steering wheel will be locked, and so will your ignition. If you take the key with you, and you have an automatic transmission, it will be locked. And remember to lock the doors.

Parking at Night

Park in a lighted spot, close all windows and lock your vehicle. Remember to keep your valuables out of sight.

Put them in a storage area, or take them with you.

Parking Lots

If you park in a lot where someone will be watching your vehicle, it’s best to lock it up and take your keys.

But what if you have to leave your ignition key?

D If possible, park in a busy, well lit area.

D Put your valuables in a storage area, like your trunk or glove box. Be sure to close and lock the storage area.

D Close all windows.

D Lock the glove box.

D Lock all the doors except the driver’s.

D Then take the door key and remote keyless entry transmitter with you.

2-13

Content Theft

-

Deterrent/Alarm

System (Option)

If your vehicle has this option, it has a theft

deterrent alarm system. Once armed, the system will sound the horn and flash the parking lamps if the vehicle is broken into.

Arming the System

The alarm system can be armed to detect break

ins by locking your vehicle with the remote keyless entry transmitter or by locking the doors with the power door lock switch.

Passive arming is also available if you would like the system to arm all by itself after the doors have been closed for a short time. When the system is armed, a red light located on top of the instrument panel will flash briefly once every two seconds. If you return to your vehicle and the red light is flashing two brief flashes every two seconds, the system is armed and the shock sensor had triggered a two minute alarm. If the red light is flashing three times every two seconds, the system is armed and there was an intrusion that sounded the alarm. Horn chirps and parking lamp flashes can be customized to your personal preference. See “Feature

Customization” in the Index.

2-14

Turning Off the Alarm

If you started the alarm by pressing the panic button on the remote keyless entry transmitter, you must either push that button again or turn the ignition to RUN to stop the alarm.

If the alarm is sounding due to the shock sensor or a door or hatch opening, it can be turned off by either turning the ignition to RUN with a proper key or by pressing any button on the remote keyless entry transmitter. If you use your remote keyless entry transmitter to silence the alarm, additional things will happen depending upon which button you press.

D Pressing the UNLOCK button will turn the alarm off, unlock the driver’s door and disarm the system.

D Pressing the panic button or the LOCK button will turn the alarm off, keep the doors locked and keep the system armed.

D Pressing the REAR 2X button will turn the alarm off and keep the system armed. A second push of the button (within five seconds, pause slightly between presses) will unlock and disarm the hatch only.

If the alarm is sounding because an incorrect ignition key was used, press any button on the remote keyless entry transmitter to turn the alarm off.

The alarm will stop by itself after two minutes.

Shock Sensor

Coupe Convertible

The shock sensor is what triggers the alarm when it detects a blow to your vehicle. It is located over the wheelhouse near the spare tire in the hatch area, on the passenger’s side of the vehicle. There are two levels of alarms via the shock sensor. Two horn blasts and parking lamp flashes for non

threatening blows to the vehicle and a full two

minute alarm for harder blows to the vehicle. Its sensitivity can be adjusted if more or less sensitivity is desired. If sensitivity is increased too much, it may give false alarms caused by gusts of wind or other natural events that may shake the vehicle.

When your vehicle is new, there will be a label covering the adjustment knob. Remove the label and adjust the sensor as desired. Turn the knob clockwise to increase sensitivity and counterclockwise to decrease sensitivity.

The shock sensor is ignored by the alarm system when the following happens:

D The ignition is on,

D the hatch is open,

D the alarm is disarmed,

D when customized to be ignored, or

D for five seconds after the horn sounds an alarm or chirp.

The shock sensor is ignored after triggering three full alarms until the system is rearmed.

2-15

Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter Locking

If all the doors are closed, locking the vehicle with the remote keyless entry transmitter will immediately arm the system. The horn will chirp twice and the parking lamps will flash, confirming that the system is armed.

If any door is open when the LOCK button is pressed, the system goes into an armed wait mode, waiting for the doors to close. Once they are closed, the system will arm, the horn will chirp twice and the parking lamps will flash. If the hatch is open or ajar at the time the system is arming, the horn will only chirp once.

Power Door Lock Switch Locking

If any door is open when the power door lock switch is pressed, the system goes into an armed wait mode, waiting for the doors to close. Once they are closed, the system will arm and the parking lamps will flash. If both doors are closed when the power door lock switch is pressed, the system assumes you are inside the vehicle, so it will not arm. Locking the doors by using the manual door locks will not arm the system.

Passive Arming

If the ignition was just turned off and a door was opened, the system will arm six seconds after both doors are closed, whether or not you lock them. In all other cases, the system will wait 30 seconds after both doors are closed before arming, allowing you time to get into the vehicle and put the key in the ignition. The parking lamps will flash when the system arms.

The vehicle is shipped from the factory with this feature turned off. To turn this feature on, see “Feature

Customization” in the Index.

Disarming the System

There are two ways to disarm the system:

D Press the UNLOCK button on the remote keyless entry transmitter. If the horn chirps two or three times when you unlock the vehicle, the alarm sounded in your absence. Two chirps means that the shock sensor was set off and three chirps means that a door or the hatch was opened.

D Turn the ignition key to RUN.

For more information on customizing the features mentioned here, see “Feature Customization” in the Index.

2-16

PASS

-

Key

R

II

Your vehicle is equipped with the PASS

-

Key II

(Personalized Automotive

Security System) theft

deterrent system.

PASS

-

Key II is a passive theft

deterrent system. It works when you insert or remove the key from the ignition.

PASS

-

Key II uses a resistor pellet in the ignition key that matches a decoder in your vehicle.

When the PASS

-

Key II system senses that someone is using the wrong key, it shuts down the vehicle’s starter and fuel systems. For about three minutes, the starter won’t work and fuel won’t go to the engine. If someone tries to start your vehicle again or uses another key during this time, the vehicle will not start. This discourages someone from randomly trying different keys with different resistor pellets in an attempt to make a match.

The ignition key must be clean and dry before it’s inserted in the ignition or the engine may not start. If the engine does not start and the SECURITY light stays on when you try to start the vehicle, the key may be dirty or wet. Turn the ignition off.

Clean and dry the key. Wait about three minutes and try again. The SECURITY light may remain on during this time. If the starter still won’t work, and the key appears to be clean and dry, wait about three minutes and try another ignition key. At this time, you may also want to check the fuses (see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the

Index). If the starter won’t work with the other key, your vehicle needs service. If your vehicle does start, the first ignition key may be faulty. See your dealer or a locksmith who can service the PASS

-

Key II.

If you accidentally use a key that has a damaged or missing resistor pellet, the starter won’t work. The

SECURITY light will flash. But you don’t have to wait three minutes before trying another ignition key.

See your dealer or a locksmith who can service the

PASS

-

Key II to have a new key made.

If you’re ever driving and the SECURITY light comes on and stays on, you will be able to restart your engine if you turn it off. Your PASS

-

Key II system, however, is not working properly and must be serviced by your dealer.

Your vehicle is not protected by the PASS

-

Key II system.

If you lose or damage a PASS

-

Key II ignition key, see your dealer or a locksmith who can service PASS

-

Key II to have a new key made. In an emergency, call the Pontiac

Roadside Assistance Center at 1

-

800

-

ROADSIDE or

1

-

800

-

762

-

3743. (In Canada call 1

-

800

-

268

-

6800.)

2-17

Feature Customization (If Equipped)

Your vehicle’s content theft

deterrent/alarm system, locks and lighting systems can be programmed with several different features. The features you can program depend upon the options that came with your vehicle. The following chart show the features that can be programmed. To determine which features your vehicle is equipped with, follow the steps listed for entering the programming mode.

2-18

Entering Programming Mode

To program any feature, your vehicle must be in the programming mode. Follow these steps:

1. Put your key in the ignition.

2. Turn the ignition to RUN to disarm the content theft

deterrent/alarm system.

3. Turn the ignition to OFF.

4. Remove the RADIO fuse. This fuse is in the main fuse block, located on the left side of your instrument panel. When the main fuse block is open, the RADIO fuse is located in the lower right corner side of the fuse panel. See “Fuses and Circuit

Breakers” in the Index.

5. Turn the ignition towards you to ACC.

6. Count the number of chimes you hear. You will hear one to two chimes depending on the features your vehicle is equipped with. Refer to the chart shown previously.

You can now program your choices.

To exit the programming mode, follow the steps listed under “Leaving Programming Mode” later in this section.

Exit Lighting and Delayed Illumination

With exit lighting, your interior lamps will come on for up to 25 seconds when the key is removed from the ignition.

With delayed illumination, your interior lamps will come on and stay on for up to 25 seconds when entering your vehicle and up to five seconds when leaving your vehicle.

Programmable Modes

Your vehicle can be programmed to one of the following modes:

Mode 1: Both Off

Mode 2: Delayed Illumination Only

Mode 3: Exit Lighting Only

Mode 4: Both On

Vehicles are delivered programmed in Mode 4.

2-19

To change the mode, do the following:

1. Turn the courtesy lamps on by turning the instrument panel brightness control all the way up.

2. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number of chimes tells you which mode your vehicle is set for.

3. Turn the courtesy lamp switch off.

4. Turn the courtesy lamp switch from on to off until you hear the number of chimes that corresponds to the mode selection you want.

The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle.

Last Door Closed Locking and

Lockout Prevention

These features are designed to help prevent your keys from being locked in your vehicle.

Programmable Modes

Your vehicle can be programmed to one of the following modes:

Mode 1: Both Off (Doors will lock/unlock when you press the power door lock switch.)

2-20

Mode 2: Lockout Prevention Only (If you leave your keys in the ignition and leave through the driver’s door, you won’t be able to lock the doors with the power door lock switch.)

Mode 3: Last Door Closed Locking Only (If the power door lock switch is used to lock the vehicle while any door is open, you will hear three chimes. The doors will not lock until after all doors are closed.)

Mode 4: Both On (This combines Mode 2 and 3.)

Vehicles are delivered programmed in Mode 2.

To change the mode, do the following:

1. Press the power door lock switch on the door.

2. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number of chimes tells you which mode your vehicle is set for.

3. Press the power door lock switch, again, on the door until you hear the number of chimes that correspond to the mode selection you want.

The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle.

Remote Keyless Entry Verification

This feature provides feedback when the vehicle receives a command from the remote keyless entry transmitter.

Programmable Modes

Your vehicle can be programmed to one of the following modes:

Mode 1: All Off (The headlamps will not flash and the horn will not sound to provide you feedback that a lock/unlock command has been received by the remote keyless entry transmitter.)

Mode 2: Horn and Lamps/Lamps (Your horn will sound briefly and your parking lamps will flash when you press LOCK on the remote keyless entry transmitter.

Only your parking lamps will flash when you press

UNLOCK.)

Mode 3: Horn and Lamps (Your horn will sound briefly and your parking lamps will flash every time you push

LOCK or UNLOCK.)

Mode 4: Lamps (Your parking lamps will flash every time you press LOCK or UNLOCK.)

Mode 5: Lamps/Horn and Lamps/Lamps (Your lamps will flash upon the first press on LOCK, your lamps will flash and your horn will sound upon the second press on LOCK and your lamps will flash upon any press on UNLOCK.)

Vehicles are delivered programmed in Mode 5.

To change the mode, do the following:

1. Press the UNLOCK button on the remote keyless entry transmitter.

2. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number of chimes tells you which mode your vehicle is set for.

3. Press the UNLOCK button, again, on the remote keyless entry transmitter until you hear the number of chimes that correspond to the mode selection you want.

The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle.

2-21

Theft-Deterrent Arming Method

With this feature, you can program your vehicle to arm the content theft

deterrent/alarm system using the remote keyless entry transmitter, the power door lock switch or by passive arming.

Programmable Modes

Your vehicle can be programmed to one of the following modes:

Mode 1: Alarm System Off (The system will not arm.)

Mode 2: Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter Lock

(When you lock your doors using the LOCK button on the remote keyless entry transmitter, the system will arm itself.)

Mode 3: Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter/Power

Door Lock Switch (If you use either the LOCK button on the remote keyless entry transmitter or the power door lock switch to lock the doors, the system will arm itself.)

Mode 4: Passive Arming and Remote Keyless Entry

Transmitter/Power Door Lock Switch Arming (The system will arm itself after all doors are closed, plus arming per Mode 3.)

Vehicles are delivered programmed in Mode 3.

To change the mode, do the following:

1. Press the unlock switch on the door.

2. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number of chimes tells you which mode your vehicle is set for.

3. Press the unlock switch, again, on the door until you hear the number of chimes that correspond to the mode selection you want.

The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle.

2-22

Theft-Deterrent Arming Verification

With this feature, you can program your vehicle to give verification when the theft

deterrent system has been armed.

Programmable Modes

Your vehicle can be programmed to one of the following modes:

Mode 1: All Off (No horn chirps or parking lamp flash.)

Mode 2: Horn and Lamps (Your parking lamps will flash and your horn will chirp twice to verify the system is armed using any arming method.)

Mode 3: Horn and Lamps/Lamps (If you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to arm the system, your parking lamps will flash and your horn will chirp twice to verify that the system is armed. If it only chirps once, the hatch is open or unlatched. If you use either the power door lock switch or passive arming, only your parking lamps will flash for verification.)

Mode 4: Lamps (When your vehicle arms, only your parking lamps will flash for verification.)

Vehicles are delivered programmed in Mode 3.

To change the mode, do the following:

1. Press the LOCK button on the remote keyless entry transmitter.

2. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number of chimes tells you which mode your vehicle is set for.

3. Press the LOCK button, again, on the remote keyless entry transmitter until you hear the number of chimes that corresponds to the mode selection you want.

The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle.

2-23

Driver’s Door Alarm Delay and Shock

Sensor Enable

These features will allow you to change when the alarm system will sound and to turn the shock sensor on or off.

Programmable Modes

Your vehicle can be programmed to one of the following modes:

Mode 1: Zero Delay and Shock Sensor Disabled

(The alarm will sound immediately if the driver’s door is opened with your key and the shock sensor will not be available to measure sharp blows to your vehicle.)

Mode 2: Eight

-

Second Delay and Shock Sensor

Disabled (The alarm will sound eight seconds after the driver’s door is opened with your key and the shock sensor will not be available to measure sharp blows to your vehicle.)

Mode 3: Zero Delay and Shock Sensor Enabled

(The alarm will sound immediately after the driver’s door is opened with your key and the shock sensor will be available to measure sharp blows to your vehicle.)

Mode 4: Eight

-

Second Delay and Shock Sensor

Enabled (The alarm will sound eight seconds after the driver’s door is opened with your key and the shock sensor will be available to measure sharp blows to your vehicle.)

Vehicles are delivered programmed in Mode 4.

To change the mode, do the following:

1. Turn the parking lamps on and off.

2. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number of chimes tells you which mode your vehicle is set for.

3. Turn the parking lamps on and off, again, until you hear the number of chimes that corresponds to the mode selection you want.

The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions next in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle.

Leaving Programming Mode

When programming is complete, turn the ignition to

OFF and reinstall the RADIO fuse.

2-24

New Vehicle “Break

-

In”

NOTICE:

Your vehicle doesn’t need an elaborate

“break

in.” But it will perform better in the long run if you follow these guidelines:

D Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or

less for the first 500 miles (805 km).

D Don’t drive at any one speed

--

fast or slow

--

for the first 500 miles (805 km).

Don’t make full

throttle starts.

D Avoid making hard stops for the first

200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time your new brake linings aren’t yet broken in. Hard stops with new linings can mean premature wear and earlier replacement.

Follow this breaking

in guideline every time you get new brake linings.

D Don’t tow a trailer during break

in.

See “Towing a Trailer” in the Index for more information.

Ignition Positions

With the ignition key in the ignition, you can turn the switch to five positions.

ACC (A): The position in which you can operate your electrical power accessories. Push in the ignition switch as you turn it toward you.

LOCK (B): The only position from which you can remove the key. This locks your steering wheel, ignition and automatic transmission.

If you have an automatic transmission, the ignition switch can’t be turned to LOCK unless the shift lever is in PARK (P).

2-25

CAUTION:

On manual transmission vehicles, turning the key to LOCK will lock the steering column and result in a loss of ability to steer the vehicle. This could cause a collision. If you need to turn the engine off while the vehicle is moving, turn the key only to OFF. Don’t press the key release button while the vehicle is moving.

NOTICE:

If your key seems stuck in LOCK and you can’t turn it, be sure you are using the correct key; if so, is it all the way in? If it is, then turn the steering wheel left and right while you turn the key hard. But turn the key only with your hand.

Using a tool to force it could break the key or the ignition switch. If none of this works, then your vehicle needs service.

OFF (C): This position unlocks the steering wheel, ignition and automatic transmission, but does not send electrical power to any accessories. Use this position if your vehicle must be pushed or towed. A warning tone will sound if you open the driver’s door when the ignition is off and the key is in the ignition.

RUN (D): The position to which the switch returns after you start your engine and release the switch. The switch stays in RUN when the engine is running. But even when the engine is not running, you can use RUN to operate your electrical power accessories and to display some instrument panel warning and indicator lights.

START (E): Starts the engine. When the engine starts, release the key. The ignition will return to RUN for normal driving.

Even if the engine is not running, ACC and RUN or when retained accessory power (RAP) is active allows you to operate your electrical accessories, such as the radio and ventilation fan. See “Retained Accessory

Power” in the Index.

2-26

Key Release Button

If you have a manual transmission, your ignition lock has a key release button.

You must press the key release button to put the ignition key in the LOCK position before you can take your key out.

Starting Your Engine

Automatic Transmission

Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).

Your engine won’t start in any other position

--

that’s a safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.

NOTICE:

Don’t try to shift to PARK (P) if your vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your vehicle is stopped.

Manual Transmission

The gear selector should be in NEUTRAL and the parking brake engaged. Hold the clutch pedal to the floor and start the engine. Your vehicle won’t start if the clutch pedal is not all the way down

--

that’s a safety feature.

2-27

Starting Your 3800 Series II V6 Engine

1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turn your ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your engine gets warm.

NOTICE:

Holding your key in START for longer than

15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat can damage your starter motor. Wait about

15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining your battery or damaging your starter.

2. If it doesn’t start right away, hold your key in

START for about three to five seconds at a time until your engine starts. Wait about 15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining your battery or damaging your starter.

3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in START for about three seconds. If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again, do the same thing, but this time keep the pedal down for five or six seconds. This clears the extra gasoline from the engine. After waiting about

15 seconds, repeat the normal starting procedure.

NOTICE:

Your engine is designed to work with the electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical parts or accessories, you could change the way the engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment, check with your dealer. If you don’t, your engine might not perform properly.

If you ever have to have your vehicle towed, see the part of this manual that tells how to do it without damaging your vehicle. See “Towing

Your Vehicle” in the Index.

2-28

Starting Your 5.7L V8 Engine

1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your engine gets warm.

NOTICE:

Holding your key in START for longer than

15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat can damage your starter motor. Wait about

15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining your battery or damaging your starter.

2. If it doesn’t start within 10 seconds, push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor, while you hold the ignition key in START. When the engine starts, let go of the key and let up on the accelerator pedal. Wait about 15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining your battery or damaging your starter.

When starting your engine in very cold weather (below

0

_F or

-

18

_C), do this:

1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition key to START and hold it there. When the engine starts, let go of the key. Use the accelerator pedal to maintain engine speed, if you have to, until your engine has run for a while.

2. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.

Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in

START for about three seconds. When the engine starts, let go of the key and accelerator. If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again, do the same thing, but this time keep the pedal down for five or six seconds. This clears the extra gasoline from the engine.

2-29

NOTICE:

Your engine is designed to work with the electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical parts or accessories, you could change the way the engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment, check with your dealer. If you don’t, your engine might not perform properly.

If you ever have to have your vehicle towed, see the part of this manual that tells how to do it without damaging your vehicle. See “Towing

Your Vehicle” in the Index.

Engine Coolant Heater (Canada Only)

In very cold weather, 0

_F (

-

18

_C) or colder, the engine coolant heater can help. You’ll get easier starting and better fuel economy during engine warm

up. Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle.

2-30

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.

The cord is attached to the outside of the underhood fuse box.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110

volt AC outlet.

CAUTION:

Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind of extension cord could overheat and cause a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded three

prong

110

volt AC outlet. If the cord won’t reach, use a heavy

duty three

prong extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and store the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving engine parts. If you don’t, it could be damaged.

How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact your dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for that particular area.

2-31

Automatic Transmission Operation

There are several different positions for your shift lever.

PARK (P): This locks your rear wheels. It’s the best position to use when you start your engine because your vehicle can’t move easily.

CAUTION:

It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.

Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.

You or others could be injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly level ground, always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P).

See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index. If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.

2-32

Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before starting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock control system. You have to fully apply your regular brakes before you can shift from

PARK (P) when the ignition key is in RUN. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever

--

push the shift lever all the way into PARK (P) and also release the shift lever button on floor shift console models as you maintain brake application. Then move the shift lever into the gear you wish. (Press the shift lever button before moving the shift lever on floor shift console models.) See “Shifting Out of PARK (P)” in the Index.

REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.

NOTICE:

Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle is moving forward could damage your transmission. Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is stopped.

To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow, ice or sand without damaging your transmission, see

“Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow” in the Index.

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesn’t connect with the wheels. To restart when you’re already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use

NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.

CAUTION:

Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) while your engine is “racing” (running at high speed) is dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your vehicle could move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit people or objects. Don’t shift out of PARK (P) or

NEUTRAL (N) while your engine is racing.

2-33

NOTICE:

Damage to your transmission caused by shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) with the engine racing isn’t covered by your warranty.

AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. If you need more power for passing, and you’re:

D Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push your accelerator pedal about halfway down.

D Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the accelerator all the way down.

You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more power.

THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving, however, it offers more power and lower fuel economy than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D).

Here are some times you might choose THIRD (3) instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D):

D When driving on hilly, winding roads.

D When towing a trailer, so there is less shifting between gears.

D When going down a steep hill.

SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) on hills.

It can help control your speed as you go down steep mountain roads, but then you would also want to use your brakes off and on.

NOTICE:

Don’t drive in SECOND (2) for more than

25 miles (40 km), or at speeds over 55 mph

(90 km/h), or you can damage your transmission.

Use AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) or

THIRD (3) as much as possible.

Don’t shift into SECOND (2) unless you are going slower than 65 mph (105 km/h), or you can damage your engine.

2-34

FIRST (1): This position (if equipped) gives you even more power (but lower fuel economy) than

SECOND (2). You can use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the gearshift lever is put in first gear, the transmission won’t shift into FIRST (1) until the vehicle is going slowly enough.

NOTICE:

If your rear wheels can’t rotate, don’t try to drive. This might happen if you were stuck in very deep sand or mud or were up against a solid object. You could damage your transmission.

Also, if you stop when going uphill, don’t hold your vehicle there with only the accelerator pedal. This could overheat and damage the transmission. Use your brakes or shift into

PARK (P) to hold your vehicle in position on a hill.

Maximum engine speed is limited to protect driveline components from improper operation.

Manual Transmission Operation

5-Speed

This is your shift pattern for your five

speed manual transmission.

Here’s how to operate your transmission:

FIRST (1): Press the clutch and shift into FIRST (1).

Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.

You can shift into FIRST (1) when you’re going less than 20 mph (32 km/h). If you’ve come to a complete stop and it’s hard to shift into FIRST (1), put the shift lever in NEUTRAL and let up on the clutch. Press the clutch pedal back down. Then shift into FIRST (1).

2-35

SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal to the floor as you let up on the accelerator pedal and shift into SECOND (2).

Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.

THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5): Shift into

THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5) the same way you do for SECOND (2). Slowly let up on the clutch as you press the accelerator pedal.

To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press the brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press the clutch pedal and brake pedal, and shift into NEUTRAL.

NEUTRAL: Use this position when you start or idle your engine.

REVERSE (R): To back up, press the clutch pedal and shift into REVERSE (R). Let up on the clutch pedal slowly while pressing the accelerator pedal.

NOTICE:

Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is stopped. Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle is moving could damage your transmission.

Also use REVERSE (R), along with the parking brake, for parking your vehicle.

2-36

6-Speed

This is your shift pattern for you six

speed manual transmission.

Here’s how to operate your transmission:

FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift into

FIRST (1). Then slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.

You can shift into FIRST (1) when you’re going less than 20 mph (32 km/h). If you’ve come to a complete stop and it’s hard to shift into FIRST (1), put the shift lever in NEUTRAL and let up on the clutch. Press the clutch pedal down. Then shift into FIRST (1).

SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you let up on the accelerator pedal and shift into SECOND (2). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.

THIRD (3), FOURTH (4), FIFTH (5) and

SIXTH (6): Shift into THIRD (3), FOURTH (4),

FIFTH (5) and SIXTH (6) gear the same way you do for

SECOND (2). Slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.

To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press the brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press the clutch pedal and brake pedal, and shift to NEUTRAL.

NEUTRAL: Use this position when you start or idle your engine.

REVERSE (R): To back up, press the clutch pedal and shift into REVERSE (R). Let up on the clutch pedal slowly while pressing the accelerator pedal. If you shift from SIXTH (6) into REVERSE (R), the shift lever must be first placed in NEUTRAL position centered between SECOND (2) and THIRD (3) prior to shifting into REVERSE (R).

Your six

speed manual transmission has a feature that allows you to safely shift into REVERSE (R) while the vehicle is rolling at less than 5 mph (8 km/h).

If you have turned your ignition off and want to park your vehicle in REVERSE (R), you will have to move the shift lever quickly to the right, then forward into gear.

Shift Speeds

CAUTION:

If you skip a gear when you downshift, you could lose control of your vehicle. You could injure yourself or others. Don’t shift down more than one gear at a time when you downshift.

This chart shows when to shift to the next higher gear for best fuel economy.

2-37

If your speed drops below 20 mph (32 km/h), or if the engine is not running smoothly, you should downshift to the next lower gear. You may have to downshift two or more gears to keep the engine running smoothly or for good performance.

NOTICE:

If you skip more than one gear when you downshift, or if you race the engine when you downshift, you can damage the clutch or transmission.

Skip Shift Light (5.7L V8 Engine)

When the SKIP SHIFT light is on, the gearshift lever will let you shift from

FIRST (1) to FOURTH (4) instead of shifting from

FIRST (1) to SECOND (2).

This light helps you get the best possible fuel economy.

It will come on under these conditions:

D The engine coolant temperature is greater than

170

_F (77_C),

D you are going 15 to 20 mph (24 to 32 km/h) and

D you are at 35 percent throttle or less.

Follow the shift speeds listed below when the SKIP

SHIFT light is on.

Computer

-

Aided Manual Transmission Shift Speeds

D 1st to 4th @ 15 mph (24 km/h)

D 4th to 5th @ 25 mph (40 km/h)*

D 5th to 6th @ 49 mph (64 km/h)**

Each time you come to a stop, the engine’s Powertrain

Control Module (PCM) determines when to activate the

SKIP SHIFT upshift system. The SKIP SHIFT upshift system is bypassed when you accelerate very quickly from a stop.

*30 mph (48 km/h) when accelerating to highway speeds.

**45 mph (72 km/h) when accelerating to highway speeds.

Once you are in FOURTH (4), you can press the clutch again and shift into another gear.

2-38

Parking Brake

To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down and pull up on the parking brake lever. If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will come on.

To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down.

Pull the parking brake lever up until you can push in the release button. Hold the release button in as you move the brake lever all the way down.

2-39

NOTICE:

Driving with the parking brake on can cause your parking brakes to overheat. You may have to replace them, and you could also damage other parts of your vehicle.

If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index. That section shows what to do first to keep the trailer from moving.

Shifting Into PARK (P)

(Automatic Transmission Only)

CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured.

To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow. If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a

Trailer” in the Index.

1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and set the parking brake.

2-40

Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine

Running (Automatic Transmission Only)

CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with the engine running. Your vehicle could move suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine running, it could overheat and even catch fire. You or others could be injured. Don’t leave your vehicle with the engine running unless you have to.

2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by holding in the button on the lever and pushing the lever all the way toward the front of your vehicle.

3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.

4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can leave the vehicle with the ignition key in your hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).

If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you’ve moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold down the regular brake pedal. See if you can move the shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pulling it toward you. If you can, it means that the shift lever wasn’t fully locked into PARK (P).

2-41

Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission)

If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”

To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the driver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting Into

PARK (P)” in the Index.

When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of

PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission, so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).

Shifting Out of PARK (P)

(Automatic Transmission)

Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock control system. You have to fully apply your regular brake before you can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition is in RUN. See “Automatic Transmission” in the Index.

If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever

--

push the shift lever all the way into

PARK (P) and release the shift lever button as you maintain brake application. Then press the shift lever button and move the shift lever into the gear you wish.

If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t shift out of PARK (P), try this:

1. Turn the ignition key to OFF.

2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.

3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).

4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the drive gear you want.

5. Have the vehicle fixed as soon as you can.

Parking Your Vehicle

(Manual Transmission)

Before you get out of your vehicle, put your manual transmission in REVERSE (R) and firmly apply the parking brake.

If your vehicle is equipped to tow a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.

2-42

Parking Over Things That Burn

CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust parts under your vehicle and ignite. Don’t park over papers, leaves, dry grass or other things that can burn.

Engine Exhaust

CAUTION:

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas carbon monoxide (CO), which you can’t see or smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.

You might have exhaust coming in if:

D Your exhaust system sounds strange

or different.

D Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.

D Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.

D Your vehicle was damaged when driving

over high points on the road or over road debris.

D Repairs weren’t done correctly.

D Your vehicle or exhaust system had been

modified improperly.

If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your vehicle:

D Drive it only with all the windows down to

blow out any CO; and

D Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

2-43

Running Your Engine While You’re

Parked (Automatic Transmission)

It’s better not to park with the engine running. But if you ever have to, here are some things to know.

CAUTION:

Idling the engine with the climate control system off could allow dangerous exhaust into your vehicle (see the earlier Caution under

“Engine Exhaust”).

Also, idling in a closed

in place can let deadly carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if the fan switch is at the highest setting. One place this can happen is a garage. Exhaust

--

with

CO

--

can come in easily. NEVER park in a garage with the engine running.

Another closed

in place can be a blizzard.

(See “Blizzard” in the Index.)

CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.

Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to. If you’ve left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.

You or others could be injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly level ground, always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P).

Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’t move. See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index.

If you are parking on a hill and if you’re pulling a trailer, also see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.

Limited

-

Slip Rear Axle

If your vehicle has this feature, your limited

slip rear axle can give you additional traction on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works like a standard axle most of the time, but when one of the rear wheels has no traction and the other does, this feature will allow the wheel with traction to move the vehicle.

2-44

Windows

Manual Windows

Turn the window crank handle to open and close each door window.

Power Windows (If Equipped)

The switch for the driver’s window has an express

down feature. This switch is labeled AUTO. Quickly press and release the bottom of the switch for the driver’s window and the window will lower completely. You can also open the driver’s window any amount by pressing the switch again while the window is in the express

down mode when it has lowered to the position you want.

You can open the passenger’s window any amount by pressing the switch and releasing it when the window has lowered to the position you want.

To stop the window while it is lowering, press the top of the switch. To raise the window, press and hold the top of the switch.

Horn

To sound the horn, press either horn symbol on your steering wheel.

If your horn sounds two or three chirps when unlocking your vehicle with the remote keyless entry transmitter

(if equipped), the alarm was triggered while you were away. Check the vehicle before entering.

Switches on the driver’s door control each window when the ignition is on or when RAP is present.

(See “Retained Accessory Power” in the Index.)

2-45

Tilt Wheel

A tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel before you drive. The tilt wheel is located on the left side of the steering column.

You can also raise it to the highest level to give your legs more room when you exit and enter the vehicle.

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the lever. Move the steering wheel to a comfortable level, then release the lever to lock the wheel in place.

2-46

The lever located on the left side of the steering column includes your:

D Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator

D Headlamp High/Low

-

Beam Changer and

Passing Signal

D Windshield Wipers

D Windshield Washer

D Cruise Control

Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator

The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you to signal a turn or a lane change.

To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.

When the turn is finished, the lever will return automatically.

An arrow on the instrument panel cluster will flash in the direction of the turn or lane change.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer

When the high beams are on, this light located on the instrument panel cluster also will be on.

To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you complete your lane change. The lever will return by itself when you release it.

As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows don’t flash but just stay on as you signal a turn or lane change, a signal bulb may be burned out and other drivers won’t see your turn signal.

If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you signal a turn, check the fuse (see “Fuses and Circuit

Breakers” in the Index).

To change the headlamps from low beam to high or from high beam to low, pull the turn signal lever all the way toward you. Then release it.

Windshield Wipers

You control the windshield wipers by turning the band with the wiper symbol on it, located on the turn signal/multifunction lever.

For a single wiping cycle, turn the band to MIST. Hold it there until the wipers start, then let go. The wipers will stop after one cycle. If you want more cycles, hold the band on MIST longer.

You can set the wiper speed for a long or short delay between wipes. This can be very useful in light rain or snow. Turn the band to choose the delay time. The closer to LO, the shorter the delay.

2-47

For steady wiping at low speed, turn the band away from you to the LO position. For high

speed wiping, turn the band further, to HI. To stop the wipers, turn the band to OFF.

Damaged wiper blades may prevent you from seeing well enough to drive safely. To avoid damage, be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield, carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.

Heavy snow or ice can overload your wipers. A circuit breaker will stop them until the motor cools. Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.

Windshield Washer

There is a paddle with the word PUSH on it at the top of the turn signal/multifunction lever. To spray washer fluid on the windshield, just push the paddle briefly. The washer will continue to spray until you release the paddle. The wipers will clear the window and wipe a few more times before stopping or returning to the previous setting. See “Windshield Washer Fluid” in the Index.

CAUTION:

In freezing weather, don’t use your washer until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your vision.

Cruise Control

With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about

25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot on the accelerator.

This can really help on long trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).

When you apply your brakes or push the clutch pedal

(manual transmission), the cruise control shuts off.

2-48

CAUTION:

D Cruise control can be dangerous where you

can’t drive safely at a steady speed. So, don’t use your cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic.

D Cruise control can be dangerous on

slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire traction can cause needless wheel spinning, and you could lose control. Don’t use cruise control on slippery roads.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when the optional traction control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically disengage.

(See “Traction Control System” in the Index.) When road conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may turn the cruise control back on.

Setting Cruise Control

CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control switch on when you’re not using cruise, you might hit a button and go into cruise when you don’t want to. You could be startled and even lose control. Keep the cruise control switch off until you want to use cruise control.

1. Move the cruise control switch to ON.

2. Get up to the speed you want.

3. Push in the SET button at the end of the lever and release it.

4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

2-49

Resuming a Set Speed

Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed and then apply the brake or clutch pedal. This, of course, shuts off the cruise control. But you don’t need to reset it.

Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, you can move the cruise control switch from ON to

R/A (Resume/Accelerate) briefly.

You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and stay there.

Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control

There are three ways to go to a higher speed:

D Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed.

Push the button at the end of the lever, then release the button and the accelerator pedal. You’ll now cruise at the higher speed.

D To increase your speed in very small amounts, briefly move the switch to R/A and then release it.

Each time you do this, your vehicle will go about

1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.

D Move the cruise switch from ON to R/A. Hold it there until you get up to the speed you want, and then release the switch.

2-50

Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control

There are two ways to reduce your speed while using cruise control:

D Push in the button at the end of the lever until you reach the lower speed you want, then release it.

D To slow down in very small amounts, briefly push the button. Each time you do this, you’ll go about

1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well your cruise control will work on hills depends upon your speed, load and the steepness of the hills.

When going up steep hills, you may have to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course, applying the brake takes you out of cruise control. Many drivers find this to be too much trouble and don’t use cruise control on steep hills.

Ending Out of Cruise Control

There are several ways to turn off the cruise control:

D Step lightly on the brake pedal or push the clutch pedal, if you have a manual transmission, or

D Move the cruise switch to OFF.

Erasing Speed Memory

When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, your cruise control set speed memory is erased.

Exterior Lamps

The main lamp control is a knob that works these lamps:

D Headlamps

D Taillamps

D Parking Lamps

D License Lamps

D Sidemarker Lamps

D Instrument Panel Lights

This setting turns on your parking lamps and other operating lamps without your headlamps.

This setting turns on your headlamps and other operating lamps and lights.

Turn the knob to OFF to turn off the lamps.

Headlamps on Reminder

If you turn the ignition off and leave the lamps on, you will hear a chime lasting up to five seconds. If the lamps are still on when you open the driver’s door, the chime will sound again.

2-51

Headlamp Doors

The headlamp doors are designed to open when you turn the headlamps on and close when you turn the headlamps off. The headlamp doors can be opened without turning on the headlamps by turning the headlamps on, then turning the switch back to the parking lamps position.

The headlamp doors should be open when driving in icy or snowy conditions to prevent the doors from freezing closed, and when washing the vehicle to help clean the headlamps.

To open the headlamp doors manually:

1. Open the hood.

2. Remove the plastic cover from the retractor motor knob.

3. Turn the retractor motor knob counterclockwise until the headlamp door is fully open. The knob will get harder to turn when the headlamp door is all the way up.

4. Reinstall the plastic cover on the retractor motor knob.

To manually close the headlamp doors, turn the lamps off and turn the retractor motor knob clockwise. If the headlamp doors aren’t working properly, see your dealer.

2-52

Daytime Running Lamps

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.

DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short periods after dawn and before sunset.

For Canadian vehicles, a light sensor on top of the instrument panel automatically turns the headlamps on, so be sure it isn’t covered.

The DRL system will not activate if the parking brake is engaged prior to turning the ignition on.

The DRL system will make your front turn signal lamps come on when:

D The ignition is on,

D the headlamp switch is OFF,

D the parking brake is released, and

D it is bright enough outside (on Canadian vehicles).

When the DRL are on, only your front turn signal lamps will be on. The taillamps, sidemarker and other lamps won’t be on. Your instrument panel won’t be lit up either. When you use your turn signals, the front turn signal and the taillamp of the desired side will flash.

For Canadian vehicles, when it’s dark enough outside, your front turn signal lamps will go out and your headlamps will come on. The other lamps that come on with your headlamps will also come on. When it’s bright enough outside, the regular lamps will go off, and your front turn signal lamps will come on.

On a non

-

Canadian vehicle, the headlamps have to be turned on manually when you need them. On Canadian and non

-

Canadian vehicles, when the headlamps are turned on, the front turn signal lamps will go out. When you use your turn signals, the front turn signal lamp and the taillamp on the desired side will flash.

As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular headlamp system when you need it.

Fog Lamps

Use your fog lamps for better vision in foggy or misty conditions. Your parking lamps must be on or your fog lamps won’t work.

Your fog lamp switch is located on your instrument panel located to the left of the steering wheel.

To turn the fog lamps on, push the right side of the fog lamp switch and a light on the switch will come on indicating that the fog lamps are on. Push the left side of the fog lamp switch to turn the fog lamps off.

The fog lamps will go off whenever your high

beam headlamps come on. When the high

beam headlamps go off, the fog lamps will come on again.

If your vehicle is equipped with the content theft

deterrent/alarm system and your fog lamp switch is on, the fog lamps may flash to indicate operation of the content theft

deterrent/alarm system. See “Content

Theft

-

Deterrent/Alarm System” in the Index.

2-53

Interior Lamps

Instrument Panel Brightness Control

The thumbwheel controls the brightness of your instrument panel lights. Move the thumbwheel to brighten or dim the lights. If you move the thumbwheel all the way up, your courtesy lamps will come on.

Courtesy Lamps

When either door is opened, several interior lamps go on. These lamps are courtesy lamps. They make it easier for you to enter and leave your vehicle.

Courtesy lamps include two map lamps on the inside rearview mirror and other lamps throughout the interior of your vehicle.

To prevent battery rundown, your interior lamps will be disabled about 10 minutes after the ignition is turned to

OFF. The 10

minute timer will be restarted if you do any of the following:

D Turn the ignition on.

D Open either door.

D Press any button on your remote keyless entry transmitter (if equipped).

D Turn the interior lamp switch from off to on.

D Open the hatch.

2-54

Delayed Illumination

With delayed illumination, the courtesy lamps will come on and stay on for 25 seconds after you enter the vehicle and close the doors. They will also stay on for five seconds after you exit the vehicle and close the doors.

Delayed illumination will be shortened if the ignition is turned to RUN or if the power locks are activated. To turn this feature on or off, see “Feature Customization” in the Index.

Exit Lighting

With exit lighting, the interior lamps will come on when you remove the key from the ignition to help you see while exiting the vehicle. To turn this feature on or off, see “Feature Customization” in the Index.

Front Map Lamps

Your inside rearview mirror includes two map lamps.

Each lamp has its own switch. Use the switch closest to the lamp to turn it on. The lamps will also come on when a door is opened.

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)

Your vehicle is equipped with a Retained Accessory

Power (RAP) feature. It allows certain features on your vehicle to continue to work up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is turned to OFF.

Your convertible top, power windows, power mirrors and audio system will work when the ignition key is in

RUN or ACC. Once the key is turned from RUN to

OFF, these features will continue to work for up to

10 minutes or until either door is opened.

Your power door unlock and remote hatch release features will work when the ignition key is in RUN or

ACC or if either door is open. Once the key is turned to

OFF, these features will continue to work for up to

10 minutes. If either door is open and the ignition key is off, these features will continue to work until both doors have been closed for about 30 seconds or until the theft

deterrent system arms. At that time, both the power door unlock and remote hatch release features will be disabled to enhance the security of the vehicle.

The power door lock function will work at all times except when lockout prevention is enabled. See

“Lockout Prevention” in the Index.

2-55

Mirrors

Inside Day/Night Rearview Mirror

An inside rearview mirror is attached to your windshield. The mirror has pivots so that you can adjust it.

You can adjust the mirror for day or night driving. Pull the tab for night driving to reduce glare. Push the tab for daytime driving.

Outside Manual Adjustable Mirror

Adjust the passenger’s side outside mirror by hand so that you can just see the side of your vehicle when you are sitting in a comfortable driving position.

Manual Remote Control Mirror

Adjust the driver’s side outside mirror with the lever located on the door. Adjust the mirror so that you can see a little of the side of your vehicle when you are sitting in a comfortable driving position.

Power Remote Control Mirrors

(If Equipped)

The power mirror control is located on the driver’s door. To adjust either mirror, move the center switch to

L (left) or to R (right). The center position is off.

Then use the touchpad to adjust the mirror.

2-56

Convex Outside Mirror

Your passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from the driver’s seat.

CAUTION:

A convex mirror can make things (like other vehicles) look farther away than they really are.

If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes.

Storage Compartments

Glove Box

To open the glove box, lift up on the lever. Use your door key to lock or unlock it. The glove box has a lamp inside.

Front Console

To use the storage area, push the button in and pull up on the console cover. It will open to the right.

Cassette and Compact Disc Storage

You have a storage area for cassette and compact discs in your console.

Map Pocket

Each door has a map pocket. There may also be a map pocket on the back of the seats.

2-57

Cargo Cover

Using the Cargo Cover

Removing the Cargo Cover

The cargo cover can be closed for hidden storage in the rear area of your vehicle. It can also help reduce noise in the vehicle when placed in the upright position, closing out the rear

end area.

When carrying large or heavy items, it is a good idea to open the cover and place the items in the rear area of the vehicle.

1. Close the cover. If the cargo cover is not closed and resting on the trim panel, it cannot be removed.

2. Pull the cover toward you to unsnap it. Then slide the cargo cover along the groove in the trim panel.

Reverse the steps to install the cover.

2-58

CAUTION:

An improperly stored cargo cover could be thrown about the vehicle during a collision or sudden maneuver. You or others could be injured. If you remove the cover, always store it outside the vehicle. When you put it back, always be sure that it is securely reattached.

NOTICE:

Don’t put papers and other things that burn into your ashtray. If you do, cigarettes or other smoking materials could set them on fire, causing damage.

To use the lighter, push it in all the way and let go.

When it’s ready, it will pop back out by itself.

Ashtray and Cigarette Lighter

Lift up the cover to open the ashtray. To remove it, lift up on either side of the ashtray. If you have an automatic transmission, the ashtray is near the front of your console. If you have a manual transmission, the ashtray is in front of your cupholder.

NOTICE:

Don’t hold a cigarette lighter in with your hand while it is heating. If you do, it won’t be able to back away from the heating element when it’s ready. That can make it overheat, damaging the lighter and the heating element.

If you plug accessories into your cigarette lighter, such as heating devices or air compressors, these accessories should have a rated current of less than 15 amps.

Exceeding this limit will result in a blown fuse.

2-59

Sun Visors

To block out glare, you can swing down the visors.

You can also swing them to the side.

Visor Vanity Mirror

Pull down the sun visor and lift the cover to expose the vanity mirror.

Accessory Power Outlet

The accessory power outlet is located behind a closed lid in front of the parking brake on the console. The plug can be used to connect electrical equipment such as a cellular phone or a CB radio. Be sure to follow the installation instructions included with the equipment.

NOTICE:

When using the accessory power outlet:

D The maximum load of any electrical

equipment should not exceed 3 amps.

D Be sure to turn off any electrical equipment

when not in use. Leaving electrical equipment on for extended periods can drain your battery.

We recommend that you see a qualified technician or your dealer for the proper installation of your equipment.

Floor Mats

Your vehicle’s floor mats are custom

fitted to the floor wells. Be sure the driver’s floor mat is in place. If it isn’t, it could interfere with the accelerator pedal, brake pedal or with the clutch pedal on manual transmissions.

2-60

T

-

Top Roof Panels (If Equipped)

Removing the T-Top Roof Panels

CAUTION:

Don’t try to remove the T

top panel while the vehicle is moving. Trying to remove the T

top panel while the vehicle is moving could cause an accident. The panel could fall into the vehicle and cause you to lose control, or it could fly off and strike another vehicle. You or others could be injured. Remove the T

top panel only when the vehicle is parked.

1. The door key unlocks the t

top panels. The lock is located over each door window. Turn the key counterclockwise to unlock the panel.

2-61

2. Then pull on the release handle to unlatch the panel.

Lift the outer edge of the panel and pull it toward you. Then carry the panel to the rear of the vehicle for storage.

Storing the T-Top Roof Panels

CAUTION:

If the T

top panel is not stored properly, it could be thrown about the vehicle in a crash or sudden maneuver. People in the vehicle could be injured.

Whenever you store the T

top panel in the vehicle, always be sure that it is stored securely in the correct storage slot with the T

top handle closed.

2-62

1. Open the cargo cover completely. Place the panel in the correct slot (DRIVER or PASSENGER) in the rear area of your vehicle. Make sure the handle is open and facing you when you put it in the storage slot.

2. Push the handle to close and secure the panel in the slot. To lock each panel in the storage area, use your door key.

2-63

Installing the T-Top Roof Panels

CAUTION:

An improperly attached roof panel may fall into or fly off the vehicle. You or others could be injured. After installing the roof panel, always check that it is firmly attached by pushing up on the underside of the panel. Check now and then to be sure the roof panel is firmly in place.

1. When installing the panels to the roof, keep the outboard edge of the panel raised about 3 inches

(8 cm) above the roof while placing the inboard edge of the panel under the center roof.

2. After the inboard edge of the panel is in position under the center roof rail, lower the outboard edge of the panel into position, close the latch and lock the T

top.

2-64

NOTICE:

Do not attempt to install the panels by sliding them horizontally toward the center roof rail.

Doing so may cause the weatherstrips to be aligned improperly, which may result in leaks and possible damage to the weatherstrips.

NOTICE:

High pressure car washes may cause water to enter your vehicle. Never spray water directly at the roof panel joints. This will cause leaks.

2-65

T-Top Sunshades

1. Start with the panel marked DRIVER FRONT.

Unlatch the driver’s side T

top, raise it halfway and close the latch handle.

2. With the top raised and resting on the center roof rail, slide the flat edge of the sunshade panel (with the vinyl side to the glass) between the glass and plastic trim, making sure the edge marked DRIVER

FRONT is pointing to the front of the vehicle.

3. Open the latch and close the T

top. Check to see if there are any gaps showing. Unlatch the T

top and adjust the sunshade as required.

4. Once the sunshade is installed properly, you can stick the Velcro

R

buttons on the glass for a proper fit every time you install the sunshades. To do this, first remove the T

top with the sunshade installed and place it upside down on a table or bench. Take care not to scratch the glass.

2-66

5. Pull the sunshade back a little and remove the backing paper from the Velcro buttons. Push the sunshade back into place, sticking the Velcro to the glass.

6. Install the T

top, close the latch and lock the

T

top. Repeat the previous steps for the passenger

side sunshade.

You can store the sunshades two different ways:

D When the T

tops are in use, store the sunshades in their storage area in the rear of the vehicle. Make sure the cargo cover is in its closed, upright position.

D When you have the T

tops off and in their storage slots, store the sunshades on the T

tops, in their installed position.

2-67

Convertible Top (If Equipped)

The following procedures explain the proper operation of your convertible top.

Lowering Your Convertible Top

NOTICE:

Don’t leave your convertible out with the top down for any long periods of time. The sun and the rain can damage your seat material and other things inside your vehicle.

1. It is recommended that you park on a level surface.

Set the parking brake firmly. Shift an automatic transmission into PARK (P) or a manual transmission into REVERSE (R).

2. Turn the ignition to ACC or RUN.

3. Lower both of the sun visors.

NOTICE:

It is not recommended that you raise or lower the top while the vehicle is moving.

NOTICE:

Don’t lower the top if it is damp or wet. When the top is down, trapped water can cause stains, mildew and damage to the inside of your vehicle.

Be sure to dry off the top before you lower it.

2-68

NOTICE:

It is not recommended to lower the top if your vehicle is out in cold weather (0

_F /

-

18

_C or

lower), or you may damage top components.

NOTICE:

Before lowering the convertible top into the storage area, be sure there are no objects in the way of the folded, stored top. The weight of a stored top on items in the storage area will cause the convertible top back glass to break.

4. Unlock the front of the convertible top by pushing on the smaller part of the latch, then pulling down on the larger part of the latch. Be sure the hook on the latch that attaches into the hole at the windshield releases.

2-69

5. Make sure there is nothing or anyone on or around the top. Push and hold the down arrow on the lower part of the convertible TOP switch.

Installing the Boot Cover

After lowering the convertible top, you may want to install the boot cover. The three

piece boot cover is stored in a bag in the trunk area.

1. Flip the two convertible top latches to the closed position.

2. Open the hatch and remove the two side covers and middle section from the storage bag.

The switch is located on the console in front of the gearshift lever. The top will automatically lower into the storage area.

2-70

3. Install the two side covers by inserting the tab into the front seatbelt cover. Lower the covers onto the vehicle.

4. Install the middle section of the cover by sliding the tabs into the slots on the right side cover. Lower the cover and insert the latch.

5. Close the hatch.

2-71

Removing Your Boot Cover

1. Open the hatch. Remove the middle piece of the cover by pushing in on the latch and lifting up on the cover.

2. Remove the two side pieces of the boot cover by lifting the rear cover and sliding them out of their slots.

2-72

3. Store each piece of the cover in its separate compartment according to the graphic printed inside of the storage bag. Store the bag in the trunk area and close the hatch.

4. Disengage the two convertible top latches.

Raising Your Convertible Top

1. It is recommended that you park on a level surface.

Set the parking brake firmly. If you have an automatic transmission, shift into PARK (P).

If you have a manual transmission, shift into

REVERSE (R).

2. Turn the ignition to ACC or RUN (or RAP must be on).

3. Lower both sun visors and lower both windows at least 3 inches (8 cm). If the boot cover is in place, it must be removed first.

NOTICE:

It is not recommended that you raise or lower the top while the vehicle is moving.

2-73

2-74

4. Push and hold the up arrow on the top part of the convertible

TOP switch.

5. Pull down on the center opening and align the hooks with the holes. Push forward on the larger part of the latch until it clicks. Do not force the latch. If it is hard to lock, the top is not properly aligned.

NOTICE:

The convertible top may be tight when pushing forward on the latch when your vehicle is new, but it will loosen up with time. Make sure that the hooks are properly aligned before using any kind of force.

If your vehicle has a power loss, such as a dead battery, you can still raise or lower the top manually by turning the valve in the driver’s side of the trunk area.

Open the hatch and find the tab located along the left side trim panel. Lift up the tab and turn the valve counterclockwise to release the hydraulic pressure. Turn the ignition key to LOCK. You can now raise or lower your top manually. Be sure to close the valve after installing your top so you can raise or lower it electrically later.

2-75

The Instrument Panel

--

Your Information System

2-76

A. Fog Lamp Switch

B. Main Lamp Control

C. Air Vents

D. Instrument Panel Cluster

E. Horn

F. Audio System

G. Glove Box

H. Remote Hatch Release

I. Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped)

J. Rear Window Defogger Button

K. Convertible Top Switch (If Equipped)

L. Traction Control System Switch (If Equipped)

M. Ashtray (Automatic Transmission)

N. Shift Lever (Automatic Transmission Shown)

O. Cupholders

P. Front Console

Q. Parking Brake Lever

R. Cigarette Lighter

S. Accessory Power Outlet

T. Comfort Controls

2-77

Instrument Panel Cluster

Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know how fast you’re going, your engine’s rpms, about how much fuel you have left and many other things you’ll need to know to drive safely and economically.

2-78

5.7L V8 Engine Shown, 3800 V6 Engine Similar (United States Shown, Canadian Similar)

Speedometer and Odometer

Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h). Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has been driven, in either miles (used in the United States) or kilometers

(used in Canada).

You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a new odometer installed. If possible, the new one has to be set to the same reading the old one had. If it can’t be, then it’s set at zero, and a label on the driver’s door must show the old reading and when the new one was installed.

Trip Odometer

The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle has been driven since you last set the trip odometer to zero.

To set the trip odometer to zero, press the TRIP

OIL/RESET knob on the instrument panel cluster.

2-79

Tachometer

The tachometer displays the engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm).

NOTICE:

Do not operate the engine with the tachometer in the red area, or engine damage may occur.

Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators

This part describes the warning lights and gages that may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you locate them.

Warning lights and gages can signal that something is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to your warning lights and gages could also save you or others from injury.

Warning lights come on when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will see in the details on the next few pages, some warning lights come on briefly when you start the engine just to let you know they’re working. If you are familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed when this happens.

Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and warning lights work together to let you know when there’s a problem with your vehicle.

When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows there may be a problem, check the section that tells you what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.

Waiting to do repairs can be costly

--

and even dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights and gages. They’re a big help.

2-80

Safety Belt Reminder Light

When the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime will come on for about eight seconds to remind people to fasten their safety belts.

The safety belt light will also come on and stay on for about 70 seconds. If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neither the chime nor the light will come on.

Air Bag Readiness Light

There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument panel, which shows AIR BAG or the air bag symbol.

The system checks the air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. The system check includes the air bag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module. For more information on the air bag system, see “Air Bag” in the Index.

United States Canada

This light will come on when you start your vehicle, and it will flash for a few seconds. Then the light should go out. This means the system is ready.

If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your air bag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle serviced right away.

2-81

Voltmeter

CAUTION:

If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start your vehicle, it means the air bag system may not be working properly. The air bags in your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle serviced right away if the air bag readiness light stays on after you start your vehicle.

The air bag readiness light should flash for a few seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

You can read the battery voltage on your voltmeter.

If it reads less than 11 volts or more than 16 volts while your engine is running, and it stays there, you may have a problem with the electrical charging system.

Have it checked right away. Driving with the voltmeter reading in a warning zone could drain your battery.

If you idle your engine for a while, the voltmeter reading might move into the low voltage zone (indicated by red dots). If the reading stays in the low voltage zone while you are driving, you may have a problem with the electrical charging system. Have it checked. While the voltmeter reads in the low voltage zone, your battery may not be able to power certain electrical accessories, like ABS. (If this happens, the ABS INOP light will come on. See “Anti

-

Lock Brake System Warning Light” in the Index.)

If you must drive a short distance with the voltmeter reading in a warning zone, turn off all your accessories, including your air conditioning and audio system.

2-82

Brake System Warning Light

Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can still work and stop you. For good braking, though, you need both parts working well.

If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.

Have your brake system inspected right away.

United States Canada

This light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If it doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a problem.

If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the floor.

It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for service. (See “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index.)

CAUTION:

Your brake system may not be working properly if the brake system warning light is on. Driving with the brake system warning light on can lead to an accident. If the light is still on after you’ve pulled off the road and stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed for service.

When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will also come on when you set your parking brake. The light will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t release fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is fully released, it means you have a brake problem.

2-83

Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light

United States Canada

With the anti

lock brake system, this light will come on when you start your engine and it will stay on for three seconds. That’s normal.

If the anti

lock brake system warning light stays on longer than normal after you’ve started your engine, turn the ignition off. Or, if the light comes on and stays on when you’re driving, stop as soon as possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine again to reset the system. If the light still stays on, or comes on again while you’re driving, your vehicle needs service. If the light is on and the regular brake system warning light isn’t on, you still have brakes, but you don’t have anti

lock brakes. Adjust your driving accordingly.

The anti

lock brake system warning light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

Traction Control System Warning Light

This warning light should come on briefly as you start the engine. If the warning light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a problem.

If it stays on, or comes on when you’re driving, there may be a problem with your traction control system and your vehicle may need service. When this warning light is on, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.

The traction control system warning light will come on if you turn the system off by pressing the TCS button located in front of the console, the warning light will come on and stay on. To turn the system back on, press the button again. The warning light should go off.

(See “Traction Control System” in the Index for more information.)

2-84

If the traction control system warning light comes on and stays on for an extended period of time when the system is turned on, your vehicle needs service.

Low Traction Light

When your anti

lock system is adjusting brake pressure to help avoid a braking skid, this light will come on.

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage

This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. If the gage pointer moves into the red area, your engine is approaching an overheating condition.

If you have the traction control system, this light will also come on when the system is limiting wheel spin.

You may feel or hear the system working, but this is normal. Slippery road conditions may exist if the low traction light comes on, so adjust your driving accordingly. The light will stay on for a few seconds after the traction control system stops limiting wheel spin.

The low traction light also comes on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be there to tell you when the anti

lock brake system or traction control system is active.

If you have been operating your vehicle under normal driving conditions, you should pull off the road, stop your vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible.

See “Engine Overheating” in the Index.

2-85

Malfunction Indicator Lamp (Service

Engine Soon Light in the United States or

Check Engine Light in Canada)

NOTICE:

If you keep driving your vehicle with this light on, after a while, your emission controls may not work as well, your fuel economy may not be as good and your engine may not run as smoothly.

This could lead to costly repairs that may not be covered by your warranty.

United States Canada

Your vehicle is equipped with a computer which monitors operation of the fuel, ignition and emission control systems.

This system is called OBD II (On

-

Board

Diagnostics

-

Second Generation) and is intended to assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner environment. The

SERVICE ENGINE SOON or CHECK ENGINE light comes on to indicate that there is a problem and service is required. Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system before any problem is apparent. This may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also designed to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction.

2-86

NOTICE:

Modifications made to the engine, transmission, exhaust or fuel system of your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with other than those of the same Tire Performance Criteria

(TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission controls and may cause the SERVICE ENGINE SOON or

CHECK ENGINE light to come on.

Modifications to these systems could lead to costly repairs not covered by your warranty. This may also result in a failure to pass a required

Emission Inspection/Maintenance test.

This light should come on, as a check to show you it is working, when the ignition is on and the engine is not running. If the light doesn’t come on, have it repaired.

This light will also come on during a malfunction in one of two ways:

D Light Flashing

--

A misfire condition has been detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and may damage the emission control system on your vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and service may be required.

D Light On Steady

--

An emission control system malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.

Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and service may be required.

If the Light Is Flashing

The following may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle:

D Reducing vehicle speed.

D Avoiding hard accelerations.

D Avoiding steep uphill grades.

D If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see

“If the Light Is On Steady” following.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,

stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.

Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the Light

Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing, follow the previous steps, and drive the vehicle to your dealer or qualified service center for service.

2-87

If the Light Is On Steady

You may be able to correct the emission system malfunction by considering the following:

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?

If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install the cap. See “Filling Your Tank” in the Index. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn the light off.

Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?

If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition will usually be corrected when the electrical system dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.

Are you low on fuel?

As your engine starts to run out of fuel, your engine may not run as efficiently as designed since small amounts of air are sucked into the fuel line causing a misfire. The system can detect this. Adding fuel should correct this condition. Make sure to install the fuel cap properly. See

“Filling Your Tank” in the Index. It will take a few driving trips to turn the light off.

Have you recently changed brands of fuel?

If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel (see

“Fuel” in the Index). Poor fuel quality will cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You may notice this as stalling after start

up, stalling when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)

This will be detected by the system and cause the light to turn on.

If you experience one or more of these conditions, change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.

If none of the above steps have made the light turn off, have your dealer or qualified service center check the vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical problems that may have developed.

2-88

Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs

Some state/provincial and local governments have or may begin programs to inspect the emission control equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle registration.

Here are some things you need to know in order to help your vehicle pass an inspection:

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the

SERVICE ENGINE SOON or CHECK ENGINE light is on or not working properly.

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD

(on

board diagnostic) system determines that critical emission control systems have not been completely diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if you have recently replaced your battery or if your battery has run down. The diagnostic system is designed to evaluate critical emission control systems during normal driving. This may take several days of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD system readiness, see your dealer or qualified service center to prepare the vehicle for inspection.

Oil Pressure Gage

3800 V6 Engine 5.7L V8 Engine

This gage tells you if there could be a problem with your engine oil pressure. The gage shows the engine oil pressure in psi (pounds per square inch) or kPa

(kilopascals) when the engine is running.

On the 3800 V6 engine, the oil pressure should be 20 to

120 psi (140 to 827 kPa). On the 5.7L V8 engine, oil pressure should be 20 to 80 psi (140 to 550 kPa). In certain situations such as long, extended idles on hot days, it could read as low as 6 psi (40 kPa) and still be considered normal. It may vary with engine speed, outside temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above the red area show the normal operating range.

Readings in the red area tell you that the engine is low on oil, or that you might have some other oil problem. See “Engine

Oil” in the Index.

2-89

CAUTION:

Don’t keep driving if the oil pressure is low.

If you do, your engine can become so hot that it catches fire. You or others could be burned.

Check your oil as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced.

Low Oil Light

NOTICE:

Damage to your engine from neglected oil problems can be costly and is not covered by your warranty.

This warning light should come on briefly while you are starting your engine. If the light doesn’t come on, have it repaired.

If the light stays on after starting your engine, your engine oil level may be too low. You may need to add oil. See “Engine Oil” in the Index.

NOTICE:

The oil level monitoring system only checks the oil level when you are starting your engine. It does not keep monitoring the level once the engine is running. Also, the oil level check only works when the engine has been turned off long enough for the oil to drain back into the oil pan.

2-90

Oil Change Light

This OIL CHANGE light should come on briefly as a bulb check when you start the engine. If the OIL

CHANGE light doesn’t come on, have it serviced.

If the OIL CHANGE light comes on and stays on for

60 seconds after you start the engine, have the oil changed.

For additional information, see “Engine Oil, When to

Change” in the Index. After changing the engine oil, the system must be reset. See “How to Reset the Oil Change

Light” in the Index.

Service Vehicle Light

This warning light should come on in your instrument panel cluster for a three

second bulb check when you first start your vehicle. If the light doesn’t come on, have it serviced.

This light will stay on steady if you have certain non

emission related vehicle problems. These problems may not be obvious and may affect vehicle performance or durability. Consult a qualified dealership for necessary repairs to maintain top vehicle performance.

2-91

Check Gages Light

This warning light will come on briefly when you start the engine.

Fuel Gage

Your fuel gage tells you about how much fuel you have left when the ignition is on.

If the light comes on and stays on while you are driving, check your gages to see if they are in the warning areas.

Hatch Ajar Light

This warning light should come on in your instrument panel cluster for a three

second bulb check when you first start your vehicle. If the light doesn’t come on, have it serviced.

This light will stay on steady if your hatch is open or ajar and the ignition key is in RUN.

When the indicator nears E (empty), you still have a little fuel left, but you should get more soon.

2-92

Here are four things that some owners ask about. All these things are normal and do not indicate that anything is wrong with the fuel gage.

D At the gas station, the gas pump shuts off before the gage reads F (full).

D It takes more (or less) fuel to fill up than the gage reads. For example, the gage reads half full, but it took more (or less) than half of the tank’s capacity to fill it.

D The gage pointer may move while cornering, braking or speeding up.

D The gage may not indicate E (empty) when the ignition is turned off.

Low Fuel Light

If your fuel is low, your vehicle’s CHECK GAGES light on your instrument panel cluster will come on.

Reduced Engine Power Light

(V6 Engine Only)

The REDUCED ENG PWR warning light should come on in your instrument panel cluster for a three

second bulb check when you first start your vehicle.

If the light doesn’t come on, have it serviced.

If the REDUCED ENG PWR warning light comes on, a noticeable reduction in the vehicle’s performance may occur. The vehicle may be driven at a reduced speed while the REDUCED ENG PWR light is on, but acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime this warning light stays on, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized Pontiac dealer as soon as possible for diagnosis and repair.

2-93

Section 3 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems

In this section, you’ll find out how to operate the comfort control and audio systems offered with your vehicle.

Be sure to read about the particular systems supplied with your vehicle.

3

-

2

3

-

3

3

-

3

3

-

4

3

-

4

3

-

5

3

-

6

3

-

6

3

-

6

Comfort Controls

Cooling

Heating

Defogging and Defrosting

Rear Window Defogger

Ventilation System

Audio Systems

Setting the Clock

Monsoon

R

AM

-

FM Stereo with Cassette

3

Tape Player and Equalizer

-

10 AM

-

FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player and Equalizer (If Equipped)

3

-

12 Trunk Mounted CD Changer (Option)

3

-

17 Theft

-

Deterrent Feature

3

-

19 Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped)

3

-

20 Understanding Radio Reception

3

-

20 Tips About Your Audio System

3

-

21 Care of Your Cassette Tape Player

3

-

22 Care of Your Compact Discs

3

-

22 Care of Your Compact Disc Player

3

-

23 Power Antenna Mast Care

3-

3-1

Comfort Controls

With this system, you can control the heating, air conditioning and ventilation in your vehicle.

Your vehicle also has the flow

through ventilation system described later in this section.

Fan Control Knob

Turn the fan knob to select the force of air you want.

Temperature Control Knob

Turn the center knob to change the temperature of the air flowing from the system. Turn it toward the red (clockwise) for warmer air and toward the blue (counterclockwise) for cooler air.

Air Control Knob

OFF: The system is off.

MAX: This setting provides maximum cooling or quick cool

down on very hot days. This setting recirculates most of the air inside your vehicle. If it is used for long periods of time the air may become dry. This setting directs air through the upper air vents.

A/C: Use A/C for normal cooling on hot days. This setting cools outside air and directs it through the upper air vents.

The air conditioner compressor operates in MAX, A/C, bi

level, blend and defrost when the outside temperature is above freezing. When the air conditioner is on, you may sometimes notice slight changes in your vehicle’s engine speed and power due to the operation of the compressor.

3-2

BI

-

LEVEL: Air is directed through the upper air vents and the heater ducts.

VENT: Air flows through the upper air vents.

HEATER: This setting directs most of the air through the heater ducts and some of the air through the windshield defroster vents.

BLEND: Air is directed through the windshield defroster vents and the heater ducts.

DEFROST: This setting directs most of the air through the windshield defroster vents and some of the air through the heater ducts.

Cooling

The air conditioner works best if you keep your windows closed. On very hot days, open the windows just long enough for the hot air to escape.

1. Turn the air control knob to A/C for normal cooling.

For faster cooling, turn the knob to MAX.

2. Turn the temperature control knob to a comfortable setting.

3. Turn the fan control knob to the desired speed.

Heating

The heater works best if you keep your windows closed while using it.

1. Turn the air control knob to heater.

2. Turn the fan control knob to the desired speed.

3. Turn the temperature control knob to a comfortable setting.

During initial start

up only, if your vehicle is equipped with an optional engine coolant heater, you can use it in cold weather (around +20

_F/

-

8

_C or lower) to improve heater performance on initial start up. See “Engine

Coolant Heater” in the Index.

Bi

-

Level Heating

You may want to use bi

level heating on cool, but sunny days. This setting directs cool air toward your body and warmer air toward your feet.

1. Turn the air control knob to bi

level.

2. Turn the temperature control knob to a comfortable setting.

3. Turn the fan control knob to the desired speed.

3-3

Defogging and Defrosting

1. Turn the air control knob to defrost.

2. Turn the temperature control knob to the desired setting.

3. Turn the fan control knob to the desired speed.

The side window defogging works equally as well in the heater, blend and defrost modes.

Rear Window Defogger

The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to remove fog from the rear window.

Press the button to turn on the defogger. An indicator light will come on to remind you that the defogger is on.

The defogger will turn off automatically after about

10 minutes of use. If you turn it on again, the defogger will operate for about five minutes only. You can turn the defogger off by pressing the button again. The indicator light will go off when the system is turned off.

Do not attach anything like a temporary vehicle license or a decal across the defogger grid on the rear window.

NOTICE:

Don’t use a razor blade or something else sharp on the inside of the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage the warming grid, and the repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.

3-4

Ventilation System

Adjust the direction of airflow by moving the vents.

Your vehicle’s flow

through ventilation system supplies outside air into the vehicle when it is moving. Outside air will also enter the vehicle when the blower fan is running.

For mild outside temperature when little heating or cooling is needed, you can still direct outside air through your vehicle.

1. Turn the air control knob to vent.

2. Turn the temperature control knob to a comfortable setting.

3. Turn the fan control knob to the desired speed.

Ventilation Tips

D Keep the hood and front air inlet free of ice, snow or any other obstruction (such as leaves). The heater and defroster will work far better, reducing the chance of fogging the inside of your windows.

D When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, turn the fan control knob clockwise for a few moments before driving off. This helps clear the intake ducts of snow and moisture, and reduces the chance of fogging the inside of your windows.

D Keep the air path under the front seats clear of objects. This helps air to circulate throughout your vehicle.

3-5

Audio Systems

Your audio system has been designed to operate easily and give years of listening pleasure. You will get the most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself with it first. Find out what your audio system can do and how to operate all its controls, to be sure you’re getting the most out of the advanced engineering that went into it.

If you have power door locks, your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP, you can play your audio system even after the ignition is off. See “Retained Accessory Power” in the Index.

Setting the Clock

Press and hold HR until the correct hour appears. Press and hold MIN until the correct minute appears. There will be a two

second delay before the clock goes into time

set mode, and the colon on the display will blink while in this mode.

Monsoon

R

AM-FM Stereo with Cassette

Tape Player and Equalizer

Included with the Monsoon

R

AM

-

FM Stereo with

Cassette Tape Player and Equalizer are 8 high performance speakers if you have a convertible or

10 high performance speakers if you have a coupe and a powerful 8 channel amplifier. Please see your dealer for details.

3-6

Playing the Radio

POWER

-

VOL: Push this knob to turn the system on and off. To increase volume, turn the knob clockwise.

Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume.

RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by pressing this button. When the radio is playing, press this knob to recall the station frequency.

Finding a Station

AM/FM: Press this button to switch between AM,

FM1 and FM2. The display shows your selection.

TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its stored position when you’re not using it.

SEEK: Press the up or down arrow to go to the next higher or lower station and stay there.

PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to

18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2). Just:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press AM

-

FM to select the band.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons until

SET appears on the display. Whenever you press that numbered button, the station you set will return.

5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

Setting the Tone

EQUALIZER: A seven

band equalizer is part of your audio system. Slide the levers up to boost or down to reduce frequency range.

Adjusting the Speakers

BAL: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to move the sound to the left or right speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers.

FADE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to move the sound to the front or rear speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers.

Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you’re not using them.

Playing a Cassette Tape

Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than that are so thin they may not work well in this player.

3-7

While the tape is playing, use the VOL, FADE and BAL controls just as you do for the radio. The display will show an arrow to show which side of the tape is playing.

When the down indicator arrow is lit, selections listed on the bottom side of the cassette are playing. When the up arrow is lit, selections listed on the top side of the cassette are playing. The tape player automatically begins playing the other side when it reaches the end of the tape.

If E and a number appear on the radio display, the tape won’t play because of an error.

D E10: The tape is tight and the player can’t turn the tape hubs. Remove the tape. Hold the tape with the open end down and try to turn the right hub counterclockwise with a pencil. Turn the tape over and repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily, your tape may be damaged and should not be used in the player. Try a new tape to make sure your player is working properly.

D E11: The tape is broken. Try a new tape.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be corrected, please contact your dealer. If your radio displays an error number, write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem.

PREV (1): Press this button or the SEEK down arrow to search for the previous selection on the tape. Your tape must have at least three seconds of silence between each selection for PREV or SEEK to work. The tape direction arrow blinks during PREV or SEEK operation. Press

PREV or the SEEK down arrow to stop searching. The sound will mute during PREV or SEEK operation.

NEXT (2): Press this button or the SEEK up arrow to search for the next selection on the tape. If you hold the button, the player will continue moving forward through the tape. Your tape must have at least three seconds of silence between each selection for NEXT or SEEK to work. The tape direction arrow blinks during NEXT or

SEEK operation. Press NEXT or the SEEK up arrow to stop searching. The sound will mute during NEXT or

SEEK operation.

PROG (3): Press this button to play the other side of the tape.

D (4): Press this button to reduce background noise.

Note that the double

-

D symbol will appear on the display.

Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby and the double

-

D symbol are trademarks of Dolby

Laboratories Licensing Corporation.

3-8

REV (5): Press this button to reverse the tape rapidly.

Press it again to return to playing speed. The radio will play the last selected station while the tape reverses. You may select stations during REV operation by using

SEEK or TUNE.

FWD (6): Press this button to advance quickly to another part of the tape. Press the button again to return to playing speed. The radio will play the last selected station while the tape advances. You may select stations during FWD operation by using SEEK or TUNE.

AM/FM: Press this button to play the radio when a tape is in the player.

TAPE/PLAY: Press this button to change to the tape function when the radio is on. The tape symbol with an arrow will appear on the display when the tape is active.

To return to playing the radio, press the AM

-

FM button.

EJECT: Press this button to remove the tape. The radio will play. EJECT may be activated with either the ignition or radio off. Cassettes may be loaded with the radio off if this button is pressed first.

CLN: If this message appears on the display, the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care of

Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you clean the player, press and hold EJECT for five seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display

---

to show the indicator was reset.

CD Adapter Kits

It is possible to use a portable CD player adapter kit with your cassette tape player after activating the bypass feature on your tape player.

To activate the bypass feature, use the following steps:

1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACC.

2. Turn the radio off.

3. Press and hold the TAPE/PLAY button for three seconds. The tape symbol on the display will flash for two seconds, indicating the feature is active.

4. Insert the adapter into the cassette slot. It will power up the radio and begin playing.

This override routine will remain active until EJECT is pressed.

3-9

AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player and Equalizer (If Equipped)

If your vehicle is equipped with the AM

-

FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player and Equalizer, included are four speakers. Please see your dealer for details.

If your vehicle is equipped with the Monsoon AM

-

FM

Stereo with Compact Disc Player and Equalizer (not shown), included are 8 high performance speakers if you have a convertible or 10 high performance speakers if you have a coupe and a powerful 8 channel amplifier.

This feature requires power windows and door locks.

Please see your dealer for details.

Playing the Radio

POWER

-

VOL: Push this knob to turn the system on and off. To increase volume, turn the knob clockwise.

Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume.

RECALL: Press this button briefly to recall the station being played or to display the clock. If you press the knob when the ignition is off, the clock will show for a few seconds.

Finding a Station

AM/FM: Press this button to switch between AM,

FM1 and FM2. The display shows your selection.

TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its stored position when you’re not using it.

SEEK: Press the up or down arrow to go to the next higher or lower station and stay there.

PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to

18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2). Just:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press AM

-

FM to select the band.

3. Tune in the desired station.

3-10

4. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons until

SET appears on the display. Whenever you press that numbered button, the station you set will return.

5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

Setting the Tone

EQUALIZER: A seven

band equalizer is part of your audio system. Slide the levers up to boost or down to reduce frequency range.

Adjusting the Speakers

BAL: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to move the sound to the left or right speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers.

FADE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to move the sound to the front or rear speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers.

Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you’re not using them.

Playing a Compact Disc

Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The player will pull it in. If the ignition and the radio are on, the disc will begin playing. If you want to insert a disc when the ignition is off, first press EJECT.

If you’re driving on a very rough road or if it’s very hot, the disc may not play and E (error) and a number may appear on the radio display. If the disc comes out, it could be that:

D The disc is upside down.

D It is dirty, scratched or wet.

D The air is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour and try again.)

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be corrected, please contact your dealer. If your radio displays an error number, write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem.

PREV (1): Press this button or the SEEK down arrow to go to the start of the current track if more than eight seconds have played. If you hold the button or press it more than once, the player will continue moving back through the disc.

NEXT (2): Press this button or the SEEK up arrow to go to the start of the next track. If you hold the button or press it more than once, the player will continue moving forward through the disc.

3-11

RDM (3): Press this button to hear the tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. The display will show

RDM. Press RDM again to turn off random play.

REV (5): Press and hold this button to quickly reverse within a track. Release it to play the passage. You will hear sound at a reduced volume. The display will show elapsed time.

FWD (6): Press and hold this button to quickly advance within a track. You will hear sound at a reduced volume.

The display will show elapsed time.

RECALL: Press this button to see what track is currently playing. Press RECALL again within five seconds to see how long the track has been playing.

When a new track starts to play, the track number will also appear. Press RECALL a third time and the time of day will be displayed.

AM/FM: Press this button to play the radio when a disc is playing. The disc will stop but remain in the player.

CD/PLAY: Press this button to change to the disc function when the radio is on.

EJECT: Press this button to remove the disc or stop the disc and switch to the radio. EJECT will work with the radio off.

Trunk-Mounted CD Changer (Option)

With the optional compact disc changer, you can play up to 12 discs continuously. Normal size discs may be played using the trays supplied in the magazine.

The small discs (8 cm) can be played only with specially designed trays.

NOTICE:

Place large objects in the trunk appropriately so that they will not come into contact with the CD changer.

3-12

You must first load the magazine with discs before you can play a compact disc. Each of the 12 trays holds one disc. Press the button on the back of the magazine and pull gently on one of the trays. Load the trays from bottom to top, placing a disc on the tray label side down.

If you load a disc label side up, the disc will not play and an error will occur. Gently push the tray back into the magazine slot. Repeat this procedure for loading up to 12 discs in the magazine.

Once you have loaded the discs in the magazine, slide open the door of the compact disc (CD) changer. Push the magazine into the changer in the direction of the arrow marked on top of the magazine.

Close the door by sliding it all the way to the left. If the door is left partially open, the changer will not operate and an error will occur. When the door is closed, the changer will begin checking for discs in the magazine.

This will continue for up to two minutes depending on the number of discs loaded.

To eject the magazine from the player, slide the CD changer door all the way open. The magazine will automatically eject. Remember to keep the door closed whenever possible to keep dirt and dust from getting inside the changer.

3-13

All of the CD functions are controlled by the radio buttons except for ejecting the magazine. Whenever a

CD magazine with discs is loaded in the changer, the compact disc symbol will appear on the radio display. If the CD changer is checking the magazine for CDs, the compact disc symbol will flash on the display until the changer is ready to play. When a CD begins playing, CD will appear in the bottom left corner and a disc and track number will be displayed. The disc numbers are listed on the front of the magazine.

Compact Disc Errors

If E and a number appear on the display, an error has occurred and the compact disc temporarily cannot play.

The CD changer will send an error message to the receiver to indicate:

D E30: Disc Label Side Up

D E34: CD Changer Door Open

D E35: CD Changer Cartridge Empty

If the error occurred while trying to play a CD in the compact disc player or changer, the following conditions may have caused the error:

D The road is too rough. The disc should play when the road is smoother.

D The disc is dirty, scratched or wet.

D The disc is label side up. If so, load the disc label side down.

D The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and try again.

D The CD changer door is open. Completely close the door to restore normal operation.

D An empty magazine is inserted in the CD changer.

Try the magazine again with a disc loaded on one of the trays.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected, please contact your dealer. If your radio displays an error number, write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem.

3-14

Playing a Compact Disc

If your vehicle is equipped with the Monsoon AM

-

FM

Stereo with Cassette Tape Player and Equalizer, the following buttons are used for the trunk

mounted

CD changer.

PREV (1): Press this button to go back to the start of the current track if more than eight seconds have played.

Press PREV again to go to the previous track on the disc.

NEXT (2): Press this button to advance to the next track on the disc.

PROG (3): Press this button to select the next disc in the magazine. If a CD cannot be played, its number will be skipped when selecting discs while using the

PROG button.

RANDOM (4): Press this button to enter the random play mode. RDM will appear on the display. While in this mode, the tracks on the discs will be played in random order. If you press PROG or SEEK while in the random mode, discs and tracks will be scanned randomly. Press this button again to turn off the random feature and return to normal operation.

REV (5): Press and hold this button to quickly reverse within a track. As the CD reverses, elapsed time will be displayed to help you find the correct passage.

FWD (6): Press and hold this button to quickly advance within a track. As the CD advances, elapsed time will be displayed to help you find the correct passage.

RECALL: Press this button to see what track is currently playing. Press RECALL again within five seconds to see how long the track has been playing.

When a new track starts to play, the track number will also appear. Press RECALL a third time and the time of day will be displayed.

SEEK: Press the SEEK down arrow while playing a CD to go back to the start of the current track if more than eight seconds have played. If you press it again, the changer will go to previous tracks. Press the SEEK up arrow and it will go to the next higher track on the disc.

TAPE/PLAY: Press this button to play a CD if you have a magazine loaded in the changer and the radio is playing. To return to the radio while a CD is playing, press AM

-

FM. You can also press this button to switch between a cassette tape and CD, if both are loaded.

If your vehicle is equipped with the Monsoon AM

-

FM

Stereo with Compact Disc Player and Equalizer, the following buttons are used for the trunk

mounted

CD changer.

3-15

PREV (1): Press this button to go back to the start of the current track if more than eight seconds have played.

Press PREV again to go to the previous track on the disc.

NEXT (2): Press this button to advance to the next track on the disc.

RDM (3): Press this button to enter the random play mode. RDM will appear on the display. While in this mode, the tracks on the discs will be played in random order. If you press the number four preset button or

SEEK while in the random mode, discs and tracks will be scanned randomly. Press this button again to turn off the random feature and return to normal operation.

(4): Press this button to select the next disc in the magazine. If a CD cannot be played, its number will be skipped when selecting discs while using this button.

REV (5): Press and hold this button to quickly reverse within a track. As the CD reverses, elapsed time will be displayed to help you find the correct passage.

FWD (6): Press and hold this button to quickly advance within a track. As the CD advances, elapsed time will be displayed to help you find the correct passage.

RECALL: Press this button to see what track is currently playing. Press RECALL again within five seconds to see how long the track has been playing.

When a new track starts to play, the track number will also appear. Press RECALL a third time and the time of day will be displayed.

SEEK: Press the SEEK down arrow while playing a CD to go back to the start of the current track if more than eight seconds have played. If you press it again, the changer will go to previous tracks. Press the SEEK up arrow and it will go to the next higher track on the disc.

CD/PLAY: Press this button to play a CD if you have a magazine loaded in the changer and the radio is playing.

To return to the radio while a CD is playing, press

AM

-

FM. You can also press this button to switch between a CD in the compact disc player and a CD in the trunk

mounted CD changer, if both are loaded.

3-16

Theft

-

Deterrent Feature

THEFTLOCK

R

is designed to discourage theft of your radio. It works by using a secret code to disable all radio functions whenever battery power is removed.

The THEFTLOCK feature for the radio may be used or ignored. If ignored, the system plays normally and the radio is not protected by the feature. If THEFTLOCK is activated, your radio will not operate if stolen.

When THEFTLOCK is activated, the radio will display

LOC to indicate a locked condition anytime battery power is removed. If your battery loses power for any reason, you must unlock the radio with the secret code before it will operate.

Activating the Theft

-

Deterrent Feature

The instructions which follow explain how to enter your secret code to activate the THEFTLOCK system. It is recommended that you read through all nine steps before starting the procedure.

If you allow more than 15 seconds to elapse between any steps, the radio automatically reverts to time and you must start the procedure over at Step 4.

1. Write down any three or four

digit number from

000 to 1999 and keep it in a safe place separate from the vehicle.

2. Turn the ignition to ACC or RUN.

3. Turn the radio off.

4. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down until

---

shows on the display. Next you will use the secret code number which you have written down.

5. Press MIN and 000 will appear on the display.

6. Press MIN again to make the last two digits agree with your code.

7. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree with your code.

8. Press AM

-

FM after you have confirmed that the code matches the secret code you have written down.

The display will show REP to let you know that you need to repeat Steps 5 through 7 to confirm your secret code.

9. Press AM

-

FM and this time the display will show

SEC to let you know that your radio is secure.

Note that with the ignition off, the THEFTLOCK LED indicator will flash, indicating a secured radio.

3-17

Unlocking the Theft

-

Deterrent Feature After a

Power Loss

Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than

15 seconds between steps:

1. Turn the ignition on. LOC will appear on the display.

2. Press MIN and 000 will appear on the display.

3. Press MIN again to make the last two digits agree with your code.

4. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree with your code.

5. Press AM

-

FM after you have confirmed that the code matches the secret code you have written down.

The display will show SEC, indicating the radio is now operable and secure.

If you enter the wrong code eight times, INOP will appear on the display. You will have to wait an hour with the ignition on before you can try again. When you try again, you will only have three more chances

(eight tries per chance) to enter the correct code before

INOP appears.

If you lose or forget your code, contact your dealer.

Disabling the Theft

-

Deterrent Feature

Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than

15 seconds between steps:

1. Turn the ignition to ACC or RUN.

2. Turn the radio off.

3. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down until SEC shows on the display.

4. Press MIN and 000 will appear on the display.

5. Press MIN again to make the last two digits agree with your code.

6. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree with your code.

7. Press AM

-

FM after you have confirmed that the code matches the secret code you have written down.

The display will show

---

, indicating that the radio is no longer secured.

If the code entered is incorrect, SEC will appear on the display. The radio will remain secured until the correct code is entered.

When battery power is removed and later applied to a secured radio, the radio won’t turn on and LOC will appear on the display.

To unlock a secured radio, see “Unlocking the

Theft

-

Deterrent Feature After a Power Loss” earlier in this section.

3-18

Audio Steering Wheel Controls

(If Equipped)

If your vehicle has this feature, you can control certain radio and compact disc functions using the buttons on your steering wheel.

VOLUME: Press the up or down arrow to increase or decrease volume.

PLAY: Press this button to play a cassette tape or compact disc when the radio is playing.

MUTE: Press this button to silence the system.

Press it again to turn on the sound.

SEEK: Press the up arrow to tune to the next radio station and the down arrow to tune to the previous radio station. If a cassette tape or compact disc is playing, the player will advance with the up arrow and reverse with the down arrow.

PRESET: Press this button to hear the radio stations that are set on your pushbuttons. Pressing this button while playing a tape will cause the tape to change sides.

If it is pressed while playing a CD, the CD random feature can be turned off and on.

AM

-

FM: Press this button to select AM, FM1 or FM2.

If a cassette tape or compact disc is playing, the tape or disc will stop playing and the radio will play. If this button is pressed with a CD in the CD changer, the disc will go to the next selection.

3-19

Understanding Radio Reception

AM

The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM, especially at night. The longer range, however, can cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it.

FM Stereo

FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing the sound to come and go.

Tips About Your Audio System

Hearing damage from loud noise is almost undetectable until it is too late. Your hearing can adapt to higher volumes of sound. Sound that seems normal can be loud and harmful to your hearing. Take precautions by adjusting the volume control on your radio to a safe sound level before your hearing adapts to it.

To help avoid hearing loss or damage:

D Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting.

D Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably and clearly.

NOTICE:

Before you add any sound equipment to your vehicle

--

like a tape player, CB radio, mobile telephone or two

way radio

--

be sure you can add what you want. If you can, it’s very important to do it properly. Added sound equipment may interfere with the operation of your vehicle’s engine, Delphi Delco Electronics radio or other systems, and even damage them.

Your vehicle’s systems may interfere with the operation of sound equipment that has been added improperly.

So, before adding sound equipment, check with your dealer and be sure to check Federal rules covering mobile radio and telephone units.

3-20

Care of Your Cassette Tape Player

A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes or a damaged mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight and extreme heat. If they aren’t, they may not operate properly or may cause failure of the tape player.

Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every

50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLN to indicate that you have used your tape player for 50 hours without resetting the tape clean timer. If this message appears on the display, your cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to your tapes and player. If you notice a reduction in sound quality, try a known good cassette to see if it is the tape or the tape player at fault. If this other cassette has no improvement in sound quality, clean the tape player.

The recommended cleaning method for your cassette tape player is the use of a scrubbing action, non

abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn.

The recommended cleaning cassette is available through your dealership (GM Part No. 12344789).

When using a scrubbing action, non

abrasive cleaning cassette, it is normal for the cassette to eject because your unit is equipped with a cut tape detection feature and a cleaning cassette may appear as a broken tape. To prevent the cleaning cassette from being ejected, use the following steps.

1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACC.

2. Turn the radio off.

3. Press and hold the TAPE AUX button for five seconds. The tape symbol on the display will flash for two seconds.

4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.

5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s recommended cleaning time.

When the cleaning cassette has been ejected, the cut tape detection feature is active again.

3-21

You may also choose a non

scrubbing action, wet

type cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to clean the tape head. This type of cleaning cassette will not eject on its own. A non

scrubbing action cleaner may not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner.

The use of a non

scrubbing action, dry

type cleaning cassette is not recommended.

After you clean the player, press and hold EJECT for five seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display

---

to show the indicator was reset.

Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette tape is in good condition before you have your tape player serviced.

Care of Your Compact Discs

Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.

Be sure never to touch the signal surface when handling discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.

Care of Your Compact Disc Player

The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised, due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.

3-22

Power Antenna Mast Care

Your power antenna will look its best and work well if it’s cleaned from time to time. To clean the antenna mast:

1. Turn on the ignition and radio to raise the antenna.

2. Dampen a clean cloth with mineral spirits or equivalent solvent.

3. Wipe the cloth over the mast sections, removing any dirt.

4. Wipe dry with a clean cloth.

5. Make the antenna go up and down by turning the radio or ignition off and on.

6. Repeat if necessary.

NOTICE:

Don’t lubricate the power antenna. Lubrication could damage it.

NOTICE:

Before entering an automatic car wash, turn off your radio to make the power antenna go down.

This will prevent the mast from possibly getting damaged. If the antenna does not go down when you turn the radio off, it may be damaged or need to be cleaned. In either case, lower the antenna by hand by carefully pressing the antenna down.

If the mast portion of your antenna is damaged, you can easily replace it. See your dealer for a replacement kit and follow the instructions in the kit.

3-23

Section 4 Your Driving and the Road

Here you’ll find information about driving on different kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions. We’ve also included many other useful tips on driving.

4

-

2

4

-

3

4

-

6

4

-

6

Defensive Driving

Drunken Driving

Control of a Vehicle

Braking

4

4

-

9 Traction Control System (Option)

-

11 Steering

4

-

13 Off

-

Road Recovery

4

-

13 Passing

4

-

15 Loss of Control

4

-

16 Driving at Night

4

-

18 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

4

-

21 City Driving

4

-

22 Freeway Driving

4

-

23 Before Leaving on a Long Trip

4

-

24 Highway Hypnosis

4

-

24 Hill and Mountain Roads

4

-

26 Winter Driving

4

-

30 Recreational Vehicle Towing

4

-

30 Loading Your Vehicle

4

-

32 Towing a Trailer

4-

4-1

Defensive Driving

The best advice anyone can give about driving is:

Drive defensively.

Please start with a very important safety device in your vehicle: Buckle up. (See “Safety Belts” in the Index.)

Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”

On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means

“always expect the unexpected.”

Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might do. Be ready for their mistakes.

Rear

end collisions are about the most preventable of accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following distance. It’s the best defensive driving maneuver, in both city and rural driving. You never know when the vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn suddenly.

Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on the driving task. Anything that distracts from the driving task

--

such as concentrating on a cellular telephone call, reading, or reaching for something on the floor

--

makes proper defensive driving more difficult and can even cause a collision, with resulting injury. Ask a passenger to help do things like this, or pull off the road in a safe place to do them yourself. These simple defensive driving techniques could save your life.

4-2

Drunken Driving

Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is a national tragedy. It’s the number one contributor to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims every year.

Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a vehicle:

D Judgment

D Muscular Coordination

D Vision

D Attentiveness.

Police records show that almost half of all motor vehicle

related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases, these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking and driving. In recent years, over 17,000 annual motor vehicle

related deaths have been associated with the use of alcohol, with more than 300,000 people injured.

Many adults

--

by some estimates, nearly half the adult population

--

choose never to drink alcohol, so they never drive after drinking. For persons under 21, it’s against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.

There are good medical, psychological and developmental reasons for these laws.

The obvious way to solve the leading highway safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive. But what if people do? How much is “too much” if the driver plans to drive? It’s a lot less than many might think. Although it depends on each person and situation, here is some general information on the problem.

The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone who is drinking depends upon four things:

D The amount of alcohol consumed

D The drinker’s body weight

D The amount of food that is consumed before and during drinking

D The length of time it has taken the drinker to consume the alcohol.

According to the American Medical Association, a

180

lb. (82 kg) person who drinks three 12

ounce

(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a

BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the same BAC by drinking three 4

ounce (120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1

-

1/2 ounces

(45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka.

4-3

It’s the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s

BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person who consumes food just before or during drinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level.

There is a gender difference, too. Women generally have a lower relative percentage of body water than men.

Since alcohol is carried in body water, this means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a man of her same body weight when each has the same number of drinks.

The law in many U.S. states sets the legal limit at a BAC of 0.10 percent. In a growing number of U.S. states, and throughout Canada, the limit is 0.08 percent. In some other countries, it’s even lower. The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.

The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we’ve seen, it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.

But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of

0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching

0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night.

All drivers are impaired at BAC levels above

0.05 percent. Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of 0.05 percent or above. A driver with a

BAC level of 0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a level of 0.15 percent, the chance is

25 times greater!

4-4

The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold showers will speed that up. “I’ll be careful” isn’t the right answer. What if there’s an emergency, a need to take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?

A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to react quickly enough to avoid the collision.

There’s something else about drinking and driving that many people don’t know. Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord or heart. This means that when anyone who has been drinking

--

driver or passenger

--

is in a crash, that person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the person had not been drinking.

CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.

Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You can have a serious

--

or even fatal

--

collision if you drive after drinking.

Please don’t drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you’re with a group, designate a driver who will not drink.

4-5

Control of a Vehicle

You have three systems that make your vehicle go where you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering and the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work at the places where the tires meet the road.

Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice, it’s easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires and road can provide. That means you can lose control of your vehicle.

(Also see “Traction Control System” in the Index.)

4-6

Braking

Braking action involves perception time and

reaction time.

First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.

That’s perception time. Then you have to bring up your foot and do it. That’s reaction time.

Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second. But that’s only an average. It might be less with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m).

That could be a lot of distance in an emergency, so keeping enough space between your vehicle and others is important.

And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly with the surface of the road (whether it’s pavement or gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in spurts

--

heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking

--

rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic following distances, you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That means better braking and longer brake life.

If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brake normally but don’t pump your brakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine stops, you will still have some power brake assist. But you will use it when you brake. Once the power assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push.

Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS)

Your vehicle has anti

lock brakes (ABS). ABS is an advanced electronic braking system that will help prevent a braking skid.

When you start your engine, or when you begin to drive away, your anti

lock brake system will check itself. You may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test is going on, and you may even notice that your brake pedal moves or pulses a little. This is normal.

United States Canada

If there’s a problem with the anti

lock brake system, this warning light will stay on. See “Anti

-

Lock Brake

System Warning Light” in the Index.

4-7

The anti

lock system can change the brake pressure faster than any driver could. The computer is programmed to make the most of available tire and road conditions.

Here’s how anti

lock works. Let’s say the road is wet.

You’re driving safely. Suddenly an animal jumps out in front of you.

You slam on the brakes. Here’s what happens with ABS.

A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.

If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer will separately work the brakes at each wheel

(with V8 engine) or at each front wheel and at both rear wheels (with V6 engine).

4-8

You can steer around the obstacle while braking hard.

As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.

Remember: Anti

lock doesn’t change the time you need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you, you won’t have time to apply your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even though you have anti

lock brakes.

Using Anti

-

Lock

Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down firmly and let anti

lock work for you. You may feel a slight brake pedal pulsation or notice some noise, but this is normal.

When your anti

lock system is adjusting brake pressure to help avoid a braking skid, this light will come on.

See “Low Traction Light” in the Index.

Braking in Emergencies

With anti

lock, you can steer and brake at the same time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more than even the very best braking.

Traction Control System (Option)

Your vehicle may have a traction control system that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery road conditions. The system operates only if it senses that one or both of the rear wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the system for V8 engines works the rear brakes and for

V8 and V6 engines reduces engine power by closing the throttle and managing engine spark to limit wheel spin.

This light will come on when your traction control system is limiting wheel spin. See “Low Traction

Light” in the Index. You may feel or hear the system working, but this is normal.

The traction control system may operate on dry roads under some conditions, and you may notice a reduction in acceleration when this happens. This is normal and doesn’t mean there’s a problem with your vehicle.

Examples of these conditions include a hard acceleration in a turn, or an abrupt upshift or downshift.

4-9

If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically disengage. When road conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may re

engage the cruise control. (See “Cruise Control” in the Index.)

When the system is on, this warning light will come on to let you know if there’s a problem with your traction control system. See “Traction

Control System Warning

Light” in the Index.

When this warning light is on, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.

The traction control system automatically comes on whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery road conditions, you should always leave the system on. But you can turn the traction control system off if you ever need to.

(You should turn the system off if your vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow. See “Rocking

Your Vehicle” in the Index.)

To turn the system off, press the TCS button located at the front of the console.

The light on the button will go off, and the traction control system warning light will come on and stay on.

If the traction control system is limiting wheel spin when you press the button, the light on the button will go off and the warning light will come on

--

but the system won’t turn off right away. It will wait until there’s no longer a current need to limit wheel spin.

You can turn the system back on at any time by pressing the button again. The light on the button should come on, and the traction control system warning light should go off.

4-10

Steering

Power Steering

If you lose power steering assist because the engine stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but it will take much more effort.

Steering Tips

Driving on Curves

It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed.

A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on the news happen on curves. Here’s why:

Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to the same laws of physics when driving on curves. The traction of the tires against the road surface makes it possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn the front wheels. If there’s no traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If you’ve ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you’ll understand this.

The traction you can get in a curve depends on the condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you’re in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.

Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve. Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control systems

--

steering and acceleration

--

have to do their work where the tires meet the road. Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too much of those places. You can lose control. Refer to

“Traction Control” in the Index.

What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you want it to go, and slow down.

Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds are based on good weather and road conditions. Under less favorable conditions you’ll want to go slower.

If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front wheels are straight ahead.

Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then accelerate gently into the straightaway.

4-11

Steering in Emergencies

There are times when steering can be more effective than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked cars and stops right in front of you. You can avoid these problems by braking

--

if you can stop in time. But sometimes you can’t; there isn’t room.

That’s the time for evasive action

--

steering around the problem.

Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like these. First apply your brakes. (See “Braking in

Emergencies” earlier in this section.) It is better to remove as much speed as you can from a possible collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left or right depending on the space available.

An emergency like this requires close attention and a quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the object.

The fact that such emergency situations are always possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts properly.

4-12

Off

-

Road Recovery

You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re driving.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.

You can turn the steering wheel up to one

quarter turn until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge.

Then turn your steering wheel to go straight down the roadway.

Passing

The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a two

lane highway waits for just the right moment, accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?

Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two

lane highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the worst of all traffic accidents

--

the head

on collision.

So here are some tips for passing:

D “Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides and to crossroads for situations that might affect your passing patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever about making a successful pass, wait for a better time.

D Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and lines.

If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass. A broken center line usually indicates it’s all right to pass

(providing the road ahead is clear). Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or a double solid line, even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic.

4-13

D Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass while you’re awaiting an opportunity. For one thing, following too closely reduces your area of vision, especially if you’re following a larger vehicle.

Also, you won’t have adequate space if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a reasonable distance.

D When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up, start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and don’t get too close. Time your move so you will be increasing speed as the time comes to move into the other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a

“running start” that more than makes up for the distance you would lose by dropping back. And if something happens to cause you to cancel your pass, you need only slow down and drop back again and wait for another opportunity.

D If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait your turn. But take care that someone isn’t trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle.

Remember to glance over your shoulder and check the blind spot.

D Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and start your left lane change signal before moving out of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal and move back into the right lane. (Remember that your right outside mirror is convex. The vehicle you just passed may seem to be farther away from you than it really is.)

D Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on two

lane roads. Reconsider before passing the next vehicle.

D Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.

Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may be slowing down or starting to turn.

D If you’re being passed, make it easy for the following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you can ease a little to the right.

4-14

Loss of Control

Let’s review what driving experts say about what happens when the three control systems (brakes, steering and acceleration) don’t have enough friction where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked.

In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger.

Skidding

In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.

Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and by not

“overdriving” those conditions. But skids are always possible.

The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.

A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.

If you have the traction control system, remember:

It helps avoid only the acceleration skid.

If you do not have traction control, or if the system is off, then an acceleration skid is also best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.

If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough, your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a second skid if it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice, gravel or other material is on the road. For safety, you’ll want to slow down and adjust your driving to these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control more limited.

While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration or braking

(including engine braking by shifting to a lower gear).

Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning clues

--

such as enough water, ice or packed snow on the road to make a

“mirrored surface”

--

and slow down when you have any doubt.

Remember: Any anti

lock brake system (ABS) helps avoid only the braking skid.

4-15

Driving at Night

Night driving is more dangerous than day driving. One reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired

--

by alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.

Here are some tips on night driving.

D Drive defensively.

D Don’t drink and drive.

D Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the glare from headlamps behind you.

D Since you can’t see as well, you may need to slow down and keep more space between you and other vehicles.

D Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.

D In remote areas, watch for animals.

D If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe place and rest.

4-16

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But as we get older these differences increase. A 50

year

old driver may require at least twice as much light to see the same thing at night as a 20

year

old.

What you do in the daytime can also affect your night vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you’re driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night. They may cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also make a lot of things invisible.

You can be temporarily blinded by approaching headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. When you are faced with severe glare (as from a driver who doesn’t lower the high beams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring directly into the approaching headlamps.

Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle clean

--

inside and out. Glare at night is made much worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would, making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.

Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your eyes moving; that way, it’s easier to pick out dimly lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night blindness

--

the inability to see in dim light

--

and aren’t even aware of it.

4-17

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet road, you can’t stop, accelerate or turn as well because your tire

to

road traction isn’t as good as on dry roads.

And, if your tires don’t have much tread left, you’ll get even less traction. It’s always wise to go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.

The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy rain can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road and even people walking.

It’s wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment in good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to separate from the inserts.

4-18

CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause accidents. They won’t work as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to one side. You could lose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a large puddle of water or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly until your brakes work normally.

Driving too fast through large water puddles or even going through some car washes can cause problems, too.

The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid puddles.

But if you can’t, try to slow down before you hit them.

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up under your tires that they can actually ride on the water.

This can happen if the road is wet enough and you’re going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.

4-19

Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can if your tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is standing on the road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephone poles or other vehicles, and raindrops “dimple” the water’s surface, there could be hydroplaning.

Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There just isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.

Driving Through Deep Standing Water

Driving Through Flowing Water

CAUTION:

Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.

If you try to drive through flowing water, as you might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can be carried away. As little as six inches of flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle. If this happens, you and other vehicle occupants could drown. Don’t ignore police warning signs, and otherwise be very cautious about trying to drive through flowing water.

NOTICE:

If you drive too quickly through deep puddles or standing water, water can come in through your engine’s air intake and badly damage your engine. Never drive through water that is slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If you can’t avoid deep puddles or standing water, drive through them very slowly.

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips

D Besides slowing down, allow some extra following distance. And be especially careful when you pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted by road spray.

D Have good tires with proper tread depth.

(See “Tires” in the Index.)

4-20

City Driving

One of the biggest problems with city streets is the amount of traffic on them. You’ll want to watch out for what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to traffic signals.

Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:

D Know the best way to get to where you are going.

Get a city map and plan your trip into an unknown part of the city just as you would for a cross

country trip.

D Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most large cities. You’ll save time and energy. (See the next part, “Freeway Driving.”)

D Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic light is there because the corner is busy enough to need it.

When a light turns green, and just before you start to move, check both ways for vehicles that have not cleared the intersection or may be running the red light.

4-21

Freeway Driving

Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways, expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.

The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the same speed most of the other drivers are driving. Too

fast or too

slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.

4-22

At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to check traffic. Try to determine where you expect to blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.

Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it’s slower. Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.

Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use your turn signal.

Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your shoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle in your

“blind” spot.

Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to move slightly slower at night.

When you want to leave the freeway, move to the proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive on to the next exit.

The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.

The exit speed is usually posted.

Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are going slower than you actually are.

Before Leaving on a Long Trip

Make sure you’re ready. Try to be well rested. If you must start when you’re not fresh

--

such as after a day’s work

--

don’t plan to make too many miles that first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you can easily drive in.

Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it serviced and maintained, it’s ready to go. If it needs service, have it done before starting out. Of course, you’ll find experienced and able service experts in

Pontiac dealerships all across North America.

They’ll be ready and willing to help if you need it.

Here are some things you can check before a trip:

D Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full?

Are all windows clean inside and outside?

D Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?

D Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked all levels?

D Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?

D Tires: They are vitally important to a safe, trouble

free trip. Is the tread good enough for long

distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the recommended pressure?

D Weather Forecasts: What’s the weather outlook along your route? Should you delay your trip a short time to avoid a major storm system?

D Maps: Do you have up

to

date maps?

4-23

Highway Hypnosis

Is there actually such a condition as “highway hypnosis”?

Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.

There is something about an easy stretch of road with the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’t let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave the road in less

than a second, and you could crash and be injured.

What can you do about highway hypnosis?

First, be aware that it can happen.

Then here are some tips:

D Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a comfortably cool interior.

D Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and to the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and your instruments frequently.

D If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest, service or parking area and take a nap, get some exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness on the highway as an emergency.

Hill and Mountain Roads

Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from driving in flat or rolling terrain.

4-24

If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make your trips safer and more enjoyable.

D Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system and transmission. These parts can work hard on mountain roads.

D Know how to go down hills. The most important thing to know is this: let your engine do some of the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go down a steep or long hill.

CAUTION:

If you don’t shift down, your brakes could get so hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down to let your engine assist your brakes on a steep downhill slope.

CAUTION:

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have to do all the work of slowing down. They could get so hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill.

You could crash. Always have your engine running and your vehicle in gear when you go downhill.

D Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine and transmission, and you can climb the hill better.

D Stay in your own lane when driving on two

lane roads in hills or mountains. Don’t swing wide or cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let you stay in your own lane.

D As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There could be something in your lane, like a stalled car or an accident.

D You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of special problems. Examples are long grades, passing or no

passing zones, a falling rocks area or winding roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate action.

4-25

Winter Driving

Here are some tips for winter driving:

D Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.

D You may want to put winter emergency supplies in your vehicle.

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if you will be driving under severe conditions, include a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you properly secure these items in your vehicle.

4-26

Driving on Snow or Ice

Most of the time, those places where your tires meet the road probably have good traction.

However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You’ll have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to be very careful.

What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s about freezing (32

_F; 0_C) and freezing rain begins to fall.

Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.

Whatever the condition or loose snow

--

smooth ice, packed, blowing

--

drive with caution.

If you have traction control, keep the system on. It will improve your ability to accelerate when driving on a slippery road. Even though your vehicle has a traction control system, you’ll want to slow down and adjust your driving to the road conditions. See “Traction

Control System” in the Index.

If you don’t have the traction control system, accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface under the tires even more.

4-27

Your anti

lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a slippery road. Even though you have the anti

lock braking system, you’ll want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement. See “Anti

-

Lock” in the Index.

D Allow greater following distance on any slippery road.

D Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges.

Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass may remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of you, brake before you are on it. Try not to brake while you’re actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers.

If You’re Caught in a Blizzard

If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a serious situation. You should probably stay with your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help and you can hike through the snow. Here are some things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your passengers safe:

D Turn on your hazard flashers.

4-28

D Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that you’ve been stopped by the snow.

D Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.

If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor mats

--

anything you can wrap around yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.

CAUTION:

Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.

This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill you. You can’t see it or smell it, so you might not know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle, especially any that is blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around again from time to time to be sure snow doesn’t collect there.

Open a window just a little on the side of the vehicle that’s away from the wind. This will help keep CO out.

Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the battery charged. You will need a well

charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.

You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.

4-29

Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until help comes.

Recreational Vehicle Towing

Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with all four wheels on the ground. If your vehicle must be towed, see “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index.

Loading Your Vehicle

NOTICE:

Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground will damage drivetrain components.

Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly carry. The Tire

-

Loading Information label found on the rear edge of the driver’s door tells you the proper size, speed rating and recommended inflation pressures for the tires on your vehicle. It also gives you important information about the number of people that can be in your vehicle and the total weight that you can carry. This weight is called the vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory

installed options.

4-30

The other label is the Certification label, found on the rear edge of the driver’s door. It tells you the gross weight capacity of your vehicle, called Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo.

Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front or rear axle.

And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread it out.

Don’t carry more than 100 lbs. (45 kg) in your rear area.

CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the

GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear

GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, and it can change the way your vehicle handles. These could cause you to lose control and crash. Also, overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle.

If you put things inside your vehicle

--

like suitcases, tools, packages or anything else

--

they will go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they’ll keep going.

4-31

CAUTION:

Things you put inside your vehicle can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or in a crash.

D Put things in the rear area of your vehicle.

Try to spread the weight evenly.

D Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,

inside the vehicle so that some of them are above the tops of the seats.

D Don’t leave an unsecured child restraint in

your vehicle.

D When you carry something inside the

vehicle, secure it whenever you can.

D Don’t leave a seat folded down unless you

need to.

Towing a Trailer

CAUTION:

If you don’t use the correct equipment and drive properly, you can lose control when you pull a trailer.

For example, if the trailer is too heavy, the brakes may not work well

--

or even at all. You and your passengers could be seriously injured. You may also damage your vehicle; the resulting repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Pull a trailer only if you have followed all the steps in this section. Ask your dealer for advice and information about towing a trailer with your vehicle.

Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the proper trailer towing equipment. To identify what the vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle, you should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that appears later in this section. But trailering is different than just driving your vehicle by itself.

Trailering means changes in handling, durability and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.

4-32

That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time

tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.

Many of these are important for your safety and that of your passengers. So please read this section carefully before you pull a trailer.

Load

pulling components such as the engine, transmission, rear axle, wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harder against the drag of the added weight. The engine is required to operate at relatively higher speeds and under greater loads, generating extra heat. What’s more, the trailer adds considerably to wind resistance, increasing the pulling requirements.

If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer

If you do, here are some important points:

D There are many different laws, including speed limit restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure your rig will be legal, not only where you live but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for this information can be state or provincial police.

D Consider using a sway control. You can ask a hitch dealer about sway controls.

D Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 1,000 miles

(1 600 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine, axle or other parts could be damaged.

D Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.

D Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.

Don’t drive faster than the maximum posted speed for trailers (or no more than 55 mph (90 km/h)) to save wear on your vehicle’s parts.

Three important considerations have to do with weight:

D the weight of the trailer,

D the weight of the trailer tongue

D and the total weight on your vehicle’s tires.

Weight of the Trailer

How heavy can a trailer safely be?

It should never weigh more than 1,500 lbs. (680 kg) under normal driving conditions. It should never weigh more than

1,000 lbs. (450 kg) when driven on long grades at high ambient temperatures (above 90

_F /32_C). But even that can be too heavy.

It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important.

And, it can also depend on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle.

4-33

You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or advice, or you can write us at:

Pontiac-GMC Customer Assistance Center

P.O. Box 436008

Pontiac, MI 48343-6008

In Canada, write to:

General Motors of Canada Limited

Customer Communication Centre

1908 Colonel Sam Drive

Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Weight of the Trailer Tongue

The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the total or gross weight of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight

(GVW) includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in the vehicle. And if you tow a trailer, you must add the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See “Loading Your

Vehicle” in the Index for more information about your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.

If you’re using a weight

carrying hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 10 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B). If you have a weight

distributing hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 12 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B).

After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to get them right simply by moving some items around in the trailer.

4-34

Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires

Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the

Tire

-

Loading Information label at the rear edge of the driver’s door or see “Loading Your Vehicle” in the Index.

Then be sure you don’t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle, including the weight of the trailer tongue.

Hitches

It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.

Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here are some rules to follow:

D The rear bumper on your vehicle is not intended for hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other bumper

type hitches to it. Use only a frame

mounted hitch that does not attach to the bumper.

D Will you have to make any holes in the body of your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? If you do, then be sure to seal the holes later when you remove the hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get into your vehicle (see “Carbon Monoxide” in the Index).

Dirt and water can, too.

Safety Chains

You should always attach chains between your vehicle and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to the road if it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper. Always leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig.

And, never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.

Trailer Brakes

If your trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs. (450 kg) loaded, then it needs its own brakes

--

and they must be adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust and maintain them properly. Because you have anti

lock brakes, do not try to tap into your vehicle’s brake system. If you do, both brake systems won’t work well, or at all.

4-35

Driving with a Trailer

Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.

Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as responsive as your vehicle is by itself.

Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform

(and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector, lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working. This lets you check your electrical connection at the same time.

During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes are still working.

Following Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer. This can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking and sudden turns.

Passing

You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.

Backing Up

Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.

Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible, have someone guide you.

Making Turns

NOTICE:

Making very sharp turns while trailering could cause the trailer to come in contact with the vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering.

When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.

4-36

Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer

When you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need a different turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring. Check with your dealer. The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.

When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working.

Driving On Grades

Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift down, you might have to use your brakes so much that they would get hot and no longer work well.

On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce the possibility of engine and transmission overheating.

If you are towing a trailer and you have an automatic transmission with overdrive, you may prefer to drive in

THIRD (3) instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D)

(or, as you need to, a lower gear).

Or, if you have a manual transmission with FIFTH (5)

(or SIXTH (6)) gear and you are towing a trailer, it’s better not to use FIFTH (5) (or SIXTH (6)) gear. Just drive in FOURTH (4) (drive in FIFTH (5) if you have a six

speed manual transmission) or, as you need to, a lower gear.

Parking on Hills

CAUTION:

You really should not park your vehicle, with a trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes wrong, your rig could start to move. People can be injured, and both your vehicle and the trailer can be damaged.

But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s how to do it:

1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into

PARK (P) yet, or into gear for a manual transmission.

2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels.

4-37

3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.

4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your parking brake, and then shift to PARK (P), or REVERSE (R) for a manual transmission.

5. Release the regular brakes.

When You Are Ready to Leave After

Parking on a Hill

1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down while you:

D Start your engine;

D Shift into a gear; and

D Release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.

Maintenance When Trailer Towing

Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more on this. Things that are especially important in trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid

(don’t overfill), engine oil, axle lubricant, drive belts, cooling system and brake system. Each of these is covered in this manual, and the Index will help you find them quickly. If you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review this information before you start your trip.

Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight.

Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing

Your cooling system may temporarily overheat during severe operating conditions. See “Engine Overheating” in the Index.

4-38

Section 5 Problems on the Road

Here you’ll find what to do about some problems that can occur on the road.

5

-

2

5

-

3

5

-

3

5

-

7

5

-

8

Hazard Warning Flashers

Other Warning Devices

Jump Starting

Towing Your Vehicle

Engine Overheating

5

5

-

11 Cooling System

5

-

22 If a Tire Goes Flat

5

-

23 Changing a Flat Tire

5

-

33 Compact Spare Tire

-

33 If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow

5-

5-1

Hazard Warning Flashers

Press the button in to make your front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off.

Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what position your key is in, or even if the key isn’t in.

To turn off the flashers, pull out on the collar.

Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They also let police know you have a problem. Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.

When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn signals won’t work.

5-2

Other Warning Devices

If you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up at the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind your vehicle.

Jump Starting

If your battery has run down, you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle. But please use the following steps to do it safely.

CAUTION:

Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous because:

D They contain acid that can burn you.

D They contain gas that can explode or ignite.

D They contain enough electricity to

burn you.

If you don’t follow these steps exactly, some or all of these things can hurt you.

NOTICE:

Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to your vehicle that wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.

The ACDelco

R

battery in your vehicle has a built

in hydrometer. Do not charge, test or jump start the battery if the hydrometer looks clear or light yellow. Replace the battery when there is a clear or light yellow hydrometer and a cranking complaint.

Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it won’t work, and it could damage your vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12

volt battery with a negative ground system.

NOTICE:

If the other system isn’t a 12

volt system with a negative ground, both vehicles can be damaged.

5-3

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching each other. If they are, it could cause a ground connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could damage the electrical systems.

To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the jump starting procedure. Put an automatic transmission in PARK (P) before setting the parking brake.

3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette lighter. Turn off all lamps that aren’t needed as well as radios. This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries. In addition, it could save your radio.

NOTICE:

If you leave your radio on, it could be badly damaged. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.

4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries.

Find the positive (+) and negative (

-

) terminals on each battery.

CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can cause battery gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this, and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if you need more light.

Be sure the battery has enough water. You don’t need to add water to the ACDelco

R

battery installed in every new GM vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low, add water to take care of that first. If you don’t, explosive gas could be present.

Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.

Don’t get it on you. If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with water and get medical help immediately.

5-4

5. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock.

The vehicles could be damaged, too.

Before you connect the cables, here are some basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to positive (+) and negative (

-

) will go to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part. Don’t connect positive (+) to negative (

-

) or you’ll get a short that would damage the battery and maybe other parts, too. And don’t connect negative (

-

) to negative (

-

) on the dead battery, as this can cause sparks.

CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts once the engine is running.

6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal of the vehicle with the dead battery.

Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.

7. Don’t let the other end touch metal. Connect it to the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.

5-5

5-6

8. Now connect the black negative (

-

) cable to the good battery’s negative (

-

) terminal.

9. Attach the cable at least

18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery, but not near engine parts that move. The electrical connection is just as good there, but the chance of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.

Don’t let the other end touch anything until the next step. The other end of the negative (

-

) cable doesn’t go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part on the engine of the vehicle with the dead battery.

10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run the engine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery.

If it won’t start after a few tries, it probably needs service.

12. Remove the cables in reverse order to prevent electrical shorting. Take care that they don’t touch each other or any other metal.

Towing Your Vehicle

CAUTION:

To help avoid serious personal injury to you or others:

D Never let passengers ride in a vehicle that is

being towed.

D Never tow faster than safe or posted speeds.

D Never tow with damaged parts not

fully secured.

D Never get under your vehicle after it has

been lifted by the tow truck.

D Always secure the vehicle on each side with

separate safety chains when towing it.

D Use only the correct hooks.

Removal Procedure

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part

B. Good Battery

C. Dead Battery

5-7

NOTICE:

Use the proper towing equipment to avoid damage to the bumper, fascia or fog lamp areas of the vehicle.

With current trends in automotive styles and design, it is essential that the correct towing equipment is used to tow a vehicle. Your vehicle can be towed with wheel

lift or car

carrier equipment.

Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if you need to have your vehicle towed. See “Roadside

Assistance” in the Index.

Engine Overheating

You will find a coolant temperature gage on your instrument panel cluster. See “Engine Coolant

Temperature Gage” in the Index.

Overheated Engine Protection

Operating Mode

This emergency operating mode allows your vehicle to be driven to a safe place in an emergency situation.

Should an overheated engine condition exist, an overheat protection mode which alternates firing groups of cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In this mode, you will notice a significant loss in power and engine performance. The CHECK GAGES light may come on and the temperature gage will indicate an overheat condition exists. Towing a trailer in the overheat protection mode should be avoided.

NOTICE:

After driving in the overheated engine protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage, allow the engine to cool before attempting any repair.

The engine oil will be severely degraded. Repair the cause of coolant loss and change the oil.

See “Engine Oil” in the Index.

5-8

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

CAUTION:

Steam from an overheated engine can burn you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it. Just turn it off and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or coolant before you open the hood.

If you keep driving when your engine is overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or others could be badly burned. Stop your engine if it overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool. See “Overheated Engine

Protection Operating Mode” in the Index.

5-9

NOTICE:

If your engine catches fire because you keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be covered by your warranty. See “Overheated

Engine Protection Operating Mode” in the Index.

If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear no steam, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:

D Climb a long hill on a hot day.

D Stop after high

speed driving.

D Idle for long periods in traffic.

D Tow a trailer.

If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam, try this for a minute or so:

1. If your air conditioner is on, turn it off.

2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan speed and open the window as necessary.

3. If you’re in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N); otherwise, shift to the highest gear while driving

--

AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) or

THIRD (3) for automatic transmissions.

If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.

If the warning doesn’t come back on, you can drive normally.

If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your vehicle right away.

If there’s still no sign of steam, idle the engine for three minutes while you’re parked. If you still have the warning, turn off the engine and get everyone out of

the vehicle until it cools down. Also, see “Overheated

Engine Protection Operating Mode” listed previously in this section.

You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service help right away.

5-10

Cooling System

When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what you’ll see:

CAUTION:

An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling, don’t do anything else until it cools down.

A. Electric Engine Cooling Fans

B. Radiator Pressure Cap

C. Coolant Recovery Tank

5-11

CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine parts, can be very hot. Don’t touch them.

If you do, you can be burned.

Don’t run the engine if there is a leak. If you run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could cause an engine fire, and you could be burned.

Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.

When it is cool, remove the coolant recovery tank cap and look at the dipstick. When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the FULL COLD mark. If it isn’t, you may have a leak in the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump or somewhere else in the cooling system.

NOTICE:

Engine damage from running your engine without coolant isn’t covered by your warranty.

See “Overheated Engine Protection Operating

Mode” in the Index.

5-12

NOTICE:

When adding coolant, it is important that you use only DEX

-

COOL

R

(silicate

free) coolant.

If coolant other than DEX

-

COOL is added to the system, premature engine, heater core or radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the engine coolant will require change sooner

--

at

30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Damage caused by the use of coolant other than DEX

-

COOL

R

is not covered by your new vehicle warranty.

If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check to see if the electric engine cooling fans are running.

If the engine is overheating, both fans should be running. If they aren’t, your vehicle needs service.

How to Add Coolant to the Coolant

Recovery Tank

If you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolant level isn’t at the FULL COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of

clean, drinkable water and DEX

-

COOL

R

engine coolant at the coolant recovery tank. (See “Engine

Coolant” in the Index for more information.)

CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot but you wouldn’t get the overheat warning. Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX

-

COOL

R

coolant.

5-13

NOTICE:

In cold weather, water can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.

Use the recommended coolant and the proper coolant mixture.

CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.

When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at the

FULL COLD mark, start your vehicle.

If the overheat warning continues, there’s one more thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant mixture directly to the radiator, but be sure the cooling system is cool before you do it.

5-14

CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system can blow out and burn you badly. They are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator pressure cap

--

even a little

--

they can come out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the cooling system, including the radiator pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap.

5-15

How to Add Coolant to the Radiator

(3800 V6 Engine Only)

NOTICE:

Your engine has a specific radiator fill procedure.

Failure to follow this procedure could cause your engine to overheat and be severely damaged.

1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap when the cooling system, including the radiator pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until it first stops. (Don’t press down while turning the pressure cap.)

If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means there is still some pressure left.

5-16

2. Then keep turning the pressure cap, but now push down as you turn it. Remove the pressure cap.

CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.

3. After the engine cools, open the coolant air bleed valve.

There is one bleed valve. It is located on the thermostat housing.

5-17

4. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX

-

COOL

R coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler neck.

(See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for more information about the proper coolant mixture.)

If you see a stream of coolant coming from an air bleed valve, close the valve. Otherwise, close the valve after the radiator is filled.

5. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the

FULL COLD mark.

6. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank, but leave the radiator pressure cap off.

5-18

7. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the engine cooling fans.

8. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add more of the proper DEX

-

COOL

R

coolant mixture through the filler neck until the level reaches the base of the filler neck.

9. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure the arrows on the pressure cap line up like this.

5-19

How to Add Coolant to the Radiator

(V8 Engine Only)

1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap when the cooling system, including the radiator pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until it first stops. (Don’t press down while turning the pressure cap.)

If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means there is still some pressure left.

5-20

2. Then keep turning the pressure cap, but now push down as you turn it. Remove the pressure cap.

CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol, and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.

3. Fill with the proper DEX

-

COOL

R

coolant mixture.

4. Continue to fill the radiator up to the base of the filler neck.

5. Rinse or wipe the spilled coolant from the engine and compartment.

6. Start the engine and allow it to run in idle for approximately four minutes. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator will be lower. Add more of the proper mixture through the filler neck until the level reaches the base of the filler neck.

7. Shut the engine off and replace the pressure cap.

Be sure the arrows on the cap line up like this.

5-21

8. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the proper level.

If a Tire Goes Flat

It’s unusual for a tire to “blow out” while you’re driving, especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly.

But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.

Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a skid and may require the same correction you’d use in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently brake to a stop

--

well off the road if possible.

If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.

5-22

Changing a Flat Tire

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your hazard warning flashers.

CAUTION:

Changing a tire can cause an injury. The vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over you or other people. You and they could be badly injured.

Find a level place to change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatic transmission shift lever in PARK (P), or shift a manual transmission to FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R).

3. Turn off the engine.

To be even more certain the vehicle won’t move, you can put blocks at the front and rear of the tire farthest away from the one being changed.

That would be the tire on the other side of the vehicle, at the opposite end.

The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and change a tire.

Removing the Spare Tire and Tools

The equipment you’ll need is located in the rear area behind the trim panel on the passenger’s side.

First you must remove the cargo cover. See “Cargo

Cover” in the Index.

5-23

On convertible models, you must also remove the trunk access panel. It’s at the upper back of the trunk. Turn the two wing fasteners under the trunk edge a quarter turn counterclockwise to remove the panel.

If you have speakers in the trim panel, you may have to disconnect the wire from the speaker. The speaker wire may be long enough to remove the trim panel without disconnecting the wire.

Find the plastic screw heads in the trim panel over the spare tire. (See “Compact Spare Tire” in the Index for more information about the compact spare.) Use a coin or a key to turn the screw heads until the slots point front and back to the unlock position. Gently lift the trim panel’s front forward edge and remove the panel.

To remove the jack and wheel wrench, loosen and remove the bolt and remove the plastic cover.

5-24

Remove the wing nut and adapter and pull out the spare.

The tools you’ll be using include the jack (A) and wheel wrench (B).

5-25

Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire

The jack has a bolt at the end. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack bolt.

Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the lift head a little.

Your vehicle has alloy wheels, first remove the decorative nut caps using the wheel wrench. Each wheel may have one locknut in place of the standard wheel nut. A special wheel lock key (removal tool) and instructions are located in the center console. Attach the wheel lock key to the socket of the wheel wrench. Remove the locking wheel nut by turning counterclockwise.

5-26

1. Using the wheel wrench, loosen all the wheel nuts.

Don’t remove them yet.

2. Position the jack under the vehicle. There is a notch in the vehicle’s rocker flange on the coupe model.

Raise the jack head until it fits firmly into the notch nearest the flat tire.

On convertible models, place the jack in a similar location.

5-27

CAUTION:

Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.

Stay away from moldings or fender flanges to avoid damaging them. Put the compact tire near you.

CAUTION:

Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly positioned can damage the vehicle and even make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head into the proper location before raising the vehicle.

5-28

5. Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts, mounting surfaces and spare wheel.

3. Raise the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough room for the spare tire to fit.

4. Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire.

CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts become loose after a time. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. When you change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from the places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to get all the rust or dirt off.

5-29

CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If you do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel could fall off, causing a serious accident.

6. Install the spare tire and replace the wheel nuts with the rounded end of the nuts toward the wheel.

Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel is held against the hub.

5-30

7. Lower the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.

8. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a crisscross sequence as shown.

Install the plastic nut caps and tighten by hand.

Then, using the wheel wrench, tighten an additional one

quarter turn.

CAUTION:

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose and even come off. This could lead to an accident.

Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to get new GM original equipment wheel nuts.

Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to

100 lb

ft (140 N·m).

NOTICE:

Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque specification.

Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools

CAUTION:

Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment could strike someone. Store all these in the proper place.

Replace the jack, wheel wrench and flat tire using the storage instructions. When you replace the trim panel, be sure to tuck it under the weatherstrip.

5-31

5-32

1. Trim Panel

2. Bolt

3. Cover

4. Jack

5. Wing Nut

6. Adapter

7. Compact Spare Tire

8. Full

-

Size Tire

9. Carpet Flap

10. Tire Storage Bolt

11. Trunk Access Panel (Convertible Only)

12. Knob

Compact Spare Tire

Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when your vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.

Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be

60 psi (420 kPa).

After installing the compact spare on your vehicle, you should stop as soon as possible and make sure your spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can finish your trip and have your full

size tire repaired or replaced where you want. Of course, it’s best to replace your spare with a full

size tire as soon as you can. Your spare will last longer and be in good shape in case you need it again.

NOTICE:

When the compact spare is installed, don’t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with guide rails. The compact spare can get caught on the rails. That can damage the tire and wheel, and maybe other parts of your vehicle.

Don’t use your compact spare on other vehicles.

And don’t mix your compact spare tire or wheel with other wheels or tires. They won’t fit. Keep your spare tire and its wheel together.

NOTICE:

Tire chains won’t fit your compact spare. Using them can damage your vehicle and can damage the chains too. Don’t use tire chains on your compact spare.

If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud,

Ice or Snow

In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will need to spin the wheels, but you don’t want to spin your wheels too fast. The method known as “rocking” can help you get out when you’re stuck, but you must use caution.

5-33

CAUTION:

If you let your tires spin at high speed, they can explode, and you or others could be injured.

And, the transmission or other parts of the vehicle can overheat. That could cause an engine compartment fire or other damage. When you’re stuck, spin the wheels as little as possible. Don’t spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the speedometer.

NOTICE:

Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the wheels too fast while shifting your transmission back and forth, you can destroy your transmission.

For information about using tire chains on your vehicle, see “Tire Chains” in the Index.

Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out

First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will clear the area around your front wheels. If your vehicle has traction control, you should turn the system off.

(See “Traction Control System” in the Index.) Then shift back and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear (or with a manual transmission, between FIRST (1) or SECOND (2) and REVERSE (R)), spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release the accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear. By slowly spinning your wheels in the forward and reverse directions, you will cause a rocking motion that may free your vehicle. If that doesn’t get you out after a few tries, you may need to be towed out. If you do need to be towed out, see “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index.

5-34

Section 6 Service and Appearance Care

Here you will find information about the care of your vehicle. This section begins with service and fuel information, and then it shows how to check important fluid and lubricant levels. There is also technical information about your vehicle, and a part devoted to its appearance care.

6

-

2

6

-

3

6

-

5

Service

Fuel

Fuels in Foreign Countries

6

-

6

6

-

8

Filling Your Tank

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

6

6

-

8 Checking Things Under the Hood

-

12 Engine Oil

6

-

18 Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

6

-

20 Automatic Transmission Fluid

6

-

24 Manual Transmission Fluid

6

-

25 Hydraulic Clutch

6

-

26 Rear Axle

6

-

26 Engine Coolant

6

-

30 Power Steering Fluid

6

-

31 Windshield Washer Fluid

6

-

32 Brakes

6

-

35 Battery

6

-

36 Bulb Replacement

6-

6

-

44 Tires

6

-

53 Appearance Care

6

-

53 Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle

6

-

55 Care of Safety Belts

6

-

56 Cleaning Glass Surfaces

6

-

56 Cleaning a Removeable Roof Panel

6

-

57 Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle

6

-

58 Cleaning Your Removeable Top

6

-

59 Cleaning Aluminum or Chrome

-

Plated

Wheels (If Equipped)

6

-

60 Underbody Maintenance

6

-

61 GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials

6

-

62 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

6

-

62 Service Parts Identification Label

6

-

63 Electrical System

6

-

69 Replacement Bulbs

6

-

69 Capacities and Specifications

6

-

71 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts

6-1

Service

Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to be happy with it. We hope you’ll go to your dealer for all your service needs. You’ll get genuine GM parts and

GM

trained and supported service people.

We hope you’ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.

Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:

Doing Your Own Service Work

If you want to do some of your own service work, you’ll want to use the proper service manual. It tells you much more about how to service your vehicle than this manual can. To order the proper service manual, see “Service and Owner Publications” in the Index.

Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to do your own service work, see “Servicing Your Air

Bag

-

Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.

You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work you perform. See “Maintenance Record” in the Index.

6-2

CAUTION:

You can be injured and your vehicle could be damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle without knowing enough about it.

D Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,

experience, the proper replacement parts and tools before you attempt any vehicle maintenance task.

D Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and

other fasteners. “English” and “metric” fasteners can be easily confused. If you use the wrong fasteners, parts can later break or fall off. You could be hurt.

Adding Equipment to the Outside of

Your Vehicle

Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind noise and affect windshield washer performance. Check with your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.

Fuel

The 8th digit of your vehicle identification number

(VIN) shows the code letter for your engine. You will find the VIN at the top left of your instrument panel.

(See “Vehicle Identification Number” in the Index.)

If you have the 3800 V6 engine (VIN Code K), use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher.

If you have the 5.7L V8 engine (VIN Code G), use premium unleaded gasoline rated at 91 octane or higher for best performance. You may use middle grade or regular unleaded gasolines, but your vehicle’s acceleration may be slightly reduced.

6-3

It is recommended that the gasoline meet specifications which have been developed by the American Automobile

Manufacturers Association (AAMA) and endorsed by the

Canadian Motor Vehicle Manufacturers Association for better vehicle performance and engine protection.

Gasolines meeting the AAMA specification could provide improved driveability and emission control system performance compared to other gasolines.

Be sure the posted octane for premium is at least 91

(at least 89 for middle grade and 87 for regular). If the octane is less than 87, you may get a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If it’s bad enough, it can damage your engine.

If you’re using fuel rated at the recommended octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service. But don’t worry if you hear a little pinging noise when you’re accelerating or driving up a hill.

That’s normal, and you don’t have to buy a higher octane fuel to get rid of pinging. It’s the heavy, constant knock that means you have a problem.

If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission

Standards (indicated on the underhood emission control label), it is designed to operate on fuels that meet

California specifications. If such fuels are not available in states adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but emission control system performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel may turn on and/or your vehicle may fail a smog

check test. (See “Malfunction

Indicator Lamp” in the Index.) If this occurs, return to your authorized Pontiac dealer for diagnosis to determine the cause of failure. In the event it is determined that the cause of the condition is the type of fuels used, repairs may not be covered by your warranty.

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low emissions may contain an octane

enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl

(MMT); ask your service station operator whether or not the fuel contains MMT. General Motors does not recommend the use of such gasolines. If fuels containing

MMT are used, spark plug life may be reduced and your emission control system performance may be affected.

The malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel may turn on. If this occurs, return to your authorized Pontiac dealer for service.

6-4

To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States are now required to contain additives that will help prevent deposits from forming in your engine and fuel system, allowing your emission control system to function properly. Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the fuel. In addition, gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in your area to contribute to clean air. General Motors recommends that you use these gasolines, particularly if they comply with the specifications described earlier.

NOTICE:

Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol. Don’t use it. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldn’t be covered under your warranty.

Fuels in Foreign Countries

If you plan on driving in another country outside the

United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.

To check on fuel availability, ask an auto club, or contact a major oil company that does business in the country where you’ll be driving.

You can also write us at the following address for advice. Just tell us where you’re going and give your

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).

General Motors Overseas Distribution Corporation

1908 Colonel Sam Drive

Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

6-5

Filling Your Tank

CAUTION:

Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. It burns violently, and that can cause very bad injuries.

Don’t smoke if you’re near gasoline or refueling your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials away from gasoline.

While refueling, hang the cap by the tether from the hook on the filler door.

To remove the cap, turn it slowly to the left

(counterclockwise). The cap has a spring in it; if you let go of the cap too soon, it will spring back to the right.

The cap is located behind a hinged door on the driver’s side of your vehicle.

6-6

CAUTION:

If you get gasoline on yourself and then something ignites it, you could be badly burned.

Gasoline can spray out on you if you open the fuel filler cap too quickly. This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel filler cap slowly and wait for any “hiss” noise to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill gasoline. Clean gasoline from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See “Cleaning the

Outside of Your Vehicle” in the Index.

When you put the cap back on, turn it to the right

(clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make sure you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in the Index.

NOTICE:

If you need a new cap, be sure to get the right type. Your dealer can get one for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly. This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light and your fuel tank and emissions system may be damaged. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in the Index.

6-7

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

CAUTION:

Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite the gasoline vapor. You can be badly burned and your vehicle damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:

D Dispense gasoline only into

approved containers.

D Do not fill a container while it is inside a

vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or on any surface other than the ground.

D Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the

inside of the fill opening before operating the nozzle. Contact should be maintained until the filling is complete.

D Don’t smoke while pumping gasoline.

Checking Things Under the Hood

CAUTION:

An electric fan under the hood can start up and injure you even when the engine is not running.

Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan.

CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and start a fire. These include liquids like gasoline, oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.

6-8

Hood Release

To open the hood, first pull the handle located inside the vehicle below the instrument panel on the driver’s side.

Then go to the front of the vehicle and pull up on the hood release located at the center of your hood.

Lift the hood.

6-9

When you open the hood of the 3800 V6 engine, you’ll see:

A. Engine Coolant Reservoir

B. Battery

C. Radiator Fill Cap

D. Engine Oil Fill Cap

E. Automatic Transmission Fluid

Dipstick (If Equipped)

6-10

F. Windshield Washer

Fluid Reservoir

G. Engine Cooling Fans

H. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

I. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir

J. Engine Oil Dipstick

K. Brake Fluid Reservoir

L. Clutch Fluid Reservoir

(If Equipped)

When you open the hood of the 5.7L V8 engine, you’ll see:

A. Engine Coolant Reservoir

B. Battery

C. Engine Oil Dipstick

D. Engine Oil Fill Cap

E. Windshield Washer

Fluid Reservoir

F. Engine Cooling Fans

G. Automatic Transmission Fluid

Dipstick (If Equipped)

H. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

I. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir

J. Brake Fluid Reservoir

K. Clutch Fluid Reservoir

(If Equipped)

6-11

Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are on.

Then pull the hood down and close it firmly.

Engine Oil

If the LOW OIL light appears on the instrument panel, it means you need to check your engine oil level right away. For more information, see “Low Oil

Light” in the Index.

You should check your engine oil level regularly; this is an added reminder.

Checking Engine Oil

It’s a good idea to check your engine oil every time you get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.

The engine oil dipstick is the yellow loop near the back of the engine.

Do not check the 5.7L V8 engine oil level after the engine has been sitting overnight. A higher than normal reading might be obtained. Check oil level with the oil warm.

Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to drain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.

6-12

Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.

3800 V6 Engine

5.7L V8 Engine

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is at or below the ADD line, then you’ll need to add at least one quart of oil. But you must use the right kind. This part explains what kind of oil to use. For crankcase capacity, see “Capacities and Specifications” in the Index.

6-13

NOTICE:

Don’t add too much oil. If your engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the cross

hatched area that shows the proper operating range, your engine could be damaged.

The oil fill cap is located at the rear of your engine compartment on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.

Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way back in when you’re through.

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use

Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified by looking for the starburst symbol.

This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). Do not use any oil which does not carry this starburst symbol.

If you change your own oil, be sure you use oil that has the starburst symbol on the front of the oil container. If you have your oil changed for you, be sure the oil put into your engine is

American Petroleum

Institute certified for gasoline engines.

You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your vehicle, as shown in the following chart:

6-14

5.7L V8 Engine

As shown in the chart, if you have the 5.7L V8 engine,

SAE 5W

-

30 is best for your vehicle. However, you can use SAE 10W

-

30 if it’s going to be 0

_F (

-

18

_C) or above. These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity oils, such as SAE 20W

-

50.

6-15

6-16

3800 V6 Engine

As shown in the chart, if you have the 3800 V6 engine,

SAE 10W

-

30 is best for your vehicle. However, you can use SAE 5W

-

30 if it’s going to be colder than 60

(16

_C) before your next oil change. When it’s very cold, you should use SAE 5W

-

_F

30. These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity oils, such as SAE 20W

-

50.

NOTICE:

Use only engine oil with the American Petroleum

Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended oil can result in engine damage not covered by your warranty.

GM Goodwrench

R

oil meets all the requirements for your vehicle.

If you are in an area where the temperature falls below

-

20

_F (

-

29

_C), consider using either an SAE 5W

-

30 synthetic oil or an SAE 0W

-

30 oil. Both will provide easier cold starting and better protection for your engine at extremely low temperatures.

Engine Oil Additives

Don’t add anything to your oil. The recommended oils with the starburst symbol are all you will need for good performance and engine protection.

When to Change Engine Oil

Your vehicle has a computer that lets you know when to change your engine oil. This is not based on mileage, but on engine revolutions and engine operating temperature.

When the computer has calculated that the oil needs changing, the GM Oil Life System t will indicate that a change is necessary. The mileage between oil and filter changes will vary depending on how you drive your vehicle

--

usually between 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and

7,500 miles (12 500 km) since your last oil and filter change. Under severe conditions, the system may come on before 3,000 miles (5 000 km). Never drive your vehicle more than 7,500 miles (12 500 km) or 12 months

(whichever occurs first) without an oil change.

The system won’t detect dust in the oil. So, if you drive in a dusty area, be sure to change your oil and filter every

3,000 miles (5 000 km) or sooner. Remember to reset the

OIL CHANGE light whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Oil Change Light

After changing the engine oil, the system must be reset.

1. Turn the ignition key to RUN and with the engine turned off.

2. Push the TRIP/OIL RESET button located on the instrument panel for 12 seconds. The OIL CHANGE light will start to flash to confirm that the system is reset. The reset is complete when the OIL CHANGE light goes out.

What to Do with Used Oil

Did you know that used engine oil contains certain elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer? Don’t let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly throw away clothing or rags containing used engine oil.

(See the manufacturer’s warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.)

Used oil can be a real threat to the environment. If you change your own oil, be sure to drain all free

flowing oil from the filter before disposal. Don’t ever dispose of oil by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask your dealer, a service station or a local recycling center for help.

6-17

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the air, it stops flame if the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Don’t drive with it off, and be careful working on the engine with the air cleaner/filter off.

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to replace the air filter.

See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.

NOTICE:

If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily get into your engine, which will damage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you’re driving.

6-18

Air Cleaner/Filter Replacement

To remove the air cleaner/filter:

1. Unlatch the two clamps located on the front of the filter.

2. Lift the cover and remove the air filter.

3. Replace the filter. See “Normal Maintenance

Replacement Parts” in the Index for the type of filter to use.

6-19

4. Close the cover without an overlap (the clamp will not latch with an overlap) and latch the clamps.

Automatic Transmission Fluid

When to Check and Change

A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid level is when the engine oil is changed.

Change both the fluid and filter every 15,000 miles

(25 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions:

D In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90

_F (32_C) or higher.

D In hilly or mountainous terrain.

D Uses such as high performance operation.

D When doing frequent trailer towing.

D Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.

If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the fluid and filter every

50,000 miles (83 000 km).

See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.

6-20

How to Check

Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may choose to have this done at the dealership service department.

If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.

NOTICE:

Too much or too little fluid can damage your transmission. Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check your transmission fluid.

Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transmission fluid level if you have been driving:

D When outside temperatures are above 90_F (32_C).

D At high speed for quite a while.

D In heavy traffic

--

especially in hot weather.

D While pulling a trailer.

To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal operating temperature, which is 180

_F to 200_F

(82

_C to 93_C).

Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles

(24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50

_F

(10

_C). If it’s colder than 50_F (10_C), drive the vehicle in DRIVE (D) until the engine temperature gage moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes. Then follow the hot check procedures.

Checking Transmission Fluid Cold

A cold check is made after the vehicle has been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off and is used only as a reference. Let the engine run at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are 50

_F (10_C) or more. If it’s colder than 50

_F (10_C), you may have to idle the engine longer. Should the fluid level be low during a cold check, you must perform a hot check before adding fluid. This will give you a more accurate reading of the fluid level.

6-21

Checking the Fluid Level

Prepare your vehicle as follows:

D Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine running.

D With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever in PARK (P).

D With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift lever through each gear range, pausing for about three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift lever in PARK (P).

D Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more.

Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:

3800 V6 Dipstick 5.7L V8 Dipstick

1. The red transmission dipstick is located near the back of the engine. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.

2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and then pull it back out again.

6-22

3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower level. The fluid level must be in the COLD area, below the cross

hatched area, for a cold check or in the HOT area or cross

hatched area for a hot check.

4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place.

How to Add Fluid

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of transmission fluid to use. See “Recommended

Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.

Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid while it is hot. (A cold check is used only as a reference.) If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper fluid to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot check. It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less than one pint (0.5 L). Don’t overfill.

NOTICE:

We recommend you use only fluid labeled

DEXRON

R

-

III, because fluid with that label is made especially for your automatic transmission.

Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON

R

-

III is not covered by your new vehicle warranty.

D After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as described under “How to Check.”

D When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place.

6-23

Manual Transmission Fluid

When to Check

A good time to have it checked is when the engine oil is changed. However, the fluid in your manual transmission doesn’t require changing.

How to Check

Because this operation can be difficult, you may choose to have this done at your Pontiac dealership service department.

If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions here, or you could get a false reading.

NOTICE:

Too much or too little fluid can damage your transmission. Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check your transmission fluid.

Check the fluid level only when your engine is off, the vehicle is parked on a level place and the transmission is cool enough for you to rest your fingers on the transmission case.

Then, follow these steps:

6

-

Speed (5

-

Speed Similar)

1. Remove the filler plug.

2. Check that the lubricant level is up to the bottom of the filler plug hole.

3. If the fluid level is good, install the plug and be sure it is fully seated. If the fluid level is low, add more fluid as described in the next steps.

6-24

How to Add Fluid

Here’s how to add fluid. Refer to the Maintenance

Schedule to determine what kind of fluid to use. See

“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.

1. Remove the filler plug.

2. Add fluid at the filler plug hole. Add only enough fluid to bring the fluid level up to the bottom of the filler plug hole.

3. Install the filler plug. Be sure the plug is fully seated.

Hydraulic Clutch

The hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle is self

adjusting. The clutch master cylinder reservoir is filled with hydraulic clutch fluid.

It is not necessary to regularly check clutch fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system. Adding fluid won’t correct a leak.

A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.

Have the system inspected and repaired.

When to Check and What to Use

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often you should check the fluid level in your clutch master cylinder reservoir and for the proper fluid. See

“Owner Checks and Services” and “Recommended

Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.

How to Check and Add Fluid

The proper fluid should be added if the level is below the plastic step on the reservoir. See the instructions on the reservoir cap.

6-25

Rear Axle

When to Check and Change Lubricant

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant and when to change it. See

“Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.

How to Check Lubricant

If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole, you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.

What to Use

Standard Differential

Use SAE 75W

-

90 Synthetic Gear Lubricant (GM

Part No. 12378261) or equivalent meeting GM

Specification 9986115.

Limited

-

Slip Differential

To add lubricant when the level is low, use SAE 75W

-

90

Synthetic Gear Lubricant (GM Part No. 12378261) or equivalent meeting GM Specification 9986115. To completely refill after draining, add 4 ounces (118 ml) of Limited

-

Slip Differential Lubricant Additive (GM

Part No. 1052358) or equivalent. Then fill to the bottom of the filler plug hole with the Synthetic Gear Lubricant.

6-26

Engine Coolant

The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with

DEX

-

COOL

R

engine coolant. This coolant is designed to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles

(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only

DEX

-

COOL

R

extended life coolant.

The following explains your cooling system and how to add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem with engine overheating or if you need to add coolant to your radiator, see “Engine Overheating” in the Index.

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and

DEX

-

COOL

R

coolant will:

D Give freezing protection down to

-

34

_F (

-

37

_C).

D Give boiling protection up to 265_F (129_C).

D Protect against rust and corrosion.

D Help keep the proper engine temperature.

D Let the warning lights and gages work as they should.

NOTICE:

When adding coolant, it is important that you use only DEX

-

COOL

R

(silicate

free) coolant.

If coolant other than DEX

-

COOL is added to the system, premature engine, heater core or radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the engine coolant will require change sooner

--

at

30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Damage caused by the use of coolant other than DEX

-

COOL

R

is not covered by your new vehicle warranty.

What to Use

Use a mixture of one

half clean, drinkable water and one

half DEX

-

COOL

R

coolant which won’t damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you don’t need to add anything else.

CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot but you wouldn’t get the overheat warning. Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX

-

COOL

R

coolant.

6-27

NOTICE:

If you use an improper coolant mixture, your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.

The repair cost wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.

If you have to add coolant more than four times a year, have your dealer check your cooling system.

NOTICE:

If you use the proper coolant, you don’t have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim to improve the system. These can be harmful.

Checking Coolant

The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your engine is cold, check the dipstick on the cap of the coolant recovery tank. The coolant level should be at COLD, or a little higher. When your engine is warm, the level on the dipstick should be up to HOT, or a little higher.

6-28

Adding Coolant to the Recovery Tank

If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX

-

COOL

R coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank, but only when your engine is cool. If the tank is very low or empty, also add coolant to the radiator. See “Engine

Overheating” in the Index for information.

CAUTION:

Turning the radiator pressure cap when the engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly.

Never turn the pressure cap

--

even a little

-when the engine and radiator are hot.

Add coolant mixture at the recovery tank, but be careful not to spill it.

CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol, and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.

Occasionally check the coolant level in the radiator.

For information on how to add coolant to the radiator, see “Cooling System” in the Index.

Radiator Pressure Cap

NOTICE:

Your radiator cap is an 18 psi (124 kPa) pressure

type cap and must be tightly installed to prevent coolant loss and possible engine damage from overheating. Be sure the arrows on the cap line up with the overflow tube on the radiator filler neck.

6-29

Power Steering Fluid

The power steering fluid reservoir is located toward the rear of the engine, on the driver’s side.

When to Check Power Steering Fluid

It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and repaired.

How to Check Power Steering Fluid

Turn the key off, let the engine compartment cool down, wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean, then unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag.

Replace the cap and completely tighten it. Then remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick.

6-30

D When the engine compartment is hot, the level should be at the H (hot) mark.

D When the engine compartment is cool, the level should be at the C (cold) mark.

What to Use

To determine what kind of fluid to use, see

“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.

Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.

Windshield Washer Fluid

What to Use

When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will be operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

NOTICE:

D When using concentrated washer fluid,

follow the manufacturer’s instructions for adding water.

D Don’t mix water with ready

to

use washer fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze and damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of the washer system. Also, water doesn’t clean as well as washer fluid.

D Fill your washer fluid tank only

three

quarters full when it’s very cold.

This allows for expansion if freezing occurs, which could damage the tank if it is completely full.

D Don’t use engine coolant (antifreeze) in

your windshield washer. It can damage your washer system and paint.

Open the cap labeled WASHER FLUID ONLY.

Add washer fluid until the tank is full.

6-31

Brakes

Brake Fluid

Your brake master cylinder reservoir is on the driver’s side of the engine compartment. It is filled with DOT

-

3 brake fluid.

There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you should have your brake system fixed, since a leak means that sooner or later your brakes won’t work well, or won’t work at all.

So, it isn’t a good idea to “top off” your brake fluid.

Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. If you add fluid when your linings are worn, then you’ll have too much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should add

(or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system.

CAUTION:

If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is hot enough. You or others could be burned, and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake fluid only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system.

6-32

When your brake fluid falls to a low level, your brake warning light will come on. See “Brake System Warning

Light” in the Index.

Checking Brake Fluid

What to Add

When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT

-

3 brake fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container only.

Refer to “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the

Maintenance Schedule.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area around the cap before removing it. This will help keep dirt from entering the reservoir.

CAUTION:

With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake system, your brakes may not work well, or they may not even work at all. This could cause a crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.

You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap.

Just look at the brake fluid reservoir. The fluid level should be above the plastic seam in the reservoir (A).

If it isn’t, have your brake system checked to see if there is a leak.

After work is done on the brake hydraulic system, make sure the level is above the plastic seam (B), near the base of the filler neck.

6-33

NOTICE:

D Using the wrong fluid can badly damage

brake system parts. For example, just a few drops of mineral

based oil, such as engine oil, in your brake system can damage brake system parts so badly that they’ll have to be replaced. Don’t let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.

D If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s

painted surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash it off immediately. See “Appearance Care” in the Index.

CAUTION:

The brake wear warning sound means that soon your brakes won’t work well. That could lead to an accident. When you hear the brake wear warning sound, have your vehicle serviced.

NOTICE:

Continuing to drive with worn

out brake pads could result in costly brake repair.

Brake Wear

Your vehicle has four

wheel disc brakes.

Disc brake pads have built

in wear indicators that make a high

pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are needed. The sound may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle is moving (except when you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly).

6-34

Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied. This does not mean something is wrong with your brakes.

When you have the front or rear brake pads replaced, have the other brakes inspected, too.

Brake linings should always be replaced as complete axle sets.

See “Brake System Inspection” in Section 7 of this manual under Part C “Periodic Maintenance Inspections.”

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.

Brake Adjustment

Every time you make a moderate brake stop, your disc brakes adjust for wear. If you rarely make a moderate or heavier stop, then your brakes might not adjust correctly.

If you drive in that way, then

--

very carefully

--

make a few moderate brake stops about every 1,000 miles

(1 600 km), so your brakes will adjust properly.

The park brake system has separate brake linings that do not self adjust for wear. If the park brake lever pulls up more than eighteen clicks, the parking brakes need adjustment. See your dealer.

Replacing Brake System Parts

The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well together if the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle was designed and tested with top

quality GM brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking system

--

for example, when your brake linings wear down and you have to have new ones put in

--

be sure you get new approved GM replacement parts. If you don’t, your brakes may no longer work properly. For example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance between your front and rear brakes can change

--

for the worse. The braking performance you’ve come to expect can change in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement brake parts.

Battery

Your new vehicle comes with a maintenance free

ACDelco

R

battery. When it’s time for a new battery, get one that has the replacement number shown on the original battery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco battery.

6-35

Vehicle Storage

If you’re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or more, remove the black, negative (

-

) cable from the battery. This will help keep your battery from running down.

CAUTION:

Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you aren’t careful. See “Jump Starting” in the Index for tips on working around a battery without getting hurt.

Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle for longer storage periods.

Also, for your audio system, see “Theft

-

Deterrent

Feature” in the Index.

Bulb Replacement

For the proper type of replacement bulb, see

“Replacement Bulbs” in the Index.

For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this section, contact your dealer’s service department.

Halogen Bulbs

CAUTION:

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bulb package.

6-36

Headlamps

Before replacing a headlamp bulb that does not light, check to make sure that the wiring connector is securely fastened to it.

See “Replacement Bulbs” in the Index to check the type of headlamp bulb you need to use before you begin to replace the headlamp bulb. You must replace a headlamp bulb with one that is exactly the same.

To replace a headlamp:

1. Open the headlamp door by turning the headlamps on, then turning the switch back to the parking lamps position. See “Headlamp Doors” in the Index for more information.

2. Remove the bezel using a Phillips screwdriver on the three main screws.

6-37

3. Remove the headlamp plate that holds the bulb to the housing by removing the two screws on top and the two screws on the bottom of the bulb with a

Torx

R

screwdriver.

4. Pull out the bulb and disconnect the electrical connector.

5. Reverse the steps with a new bulb.

6-38

Center High-Mounted Stoplamp

1. Remove the two screws in the stoplamp lens.

2. Gently pull the assembly out, turn the bulb counterclockwise and remove the bulb from the back of the assembly.

3. Reverse the steps with a new bulb.

6-39

Rear Lamps

To change any rear bulb, you have to remove the entire housing.

1. Remove the trim panel from inside of the hatch for the side that you are replacing the bulb.

2. Pull the carpet back.

4. Pull the assembly out from the outside of the vehicle.

5. To remove a socket with a tab, press the tab and turn the socket counterclockwise. To remove a socket without a tab, turn the socket counterclockwise.

6. Pull out the bulb from the socket.

7. Reverse the steps with a new bulb.

3. Remove the wing nuts.

6-40

Sidemarker

1. Remove the screw from the sidemarker assembly.

2. To pull out the bulb housing, tilt the housing to remove the end with the tab.

3. Turn the bulb and socket counterclockwise and gently pull out.

4. Reverse the steps with a new bulb.

6-41

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement

Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least twice a year for wear or cracking. See “Wiper Blade

Check” in Section 7 of this manual under Part B “Owner

Checks and Services” for more information.

Replacement blades come in different types and are removed in different ways. For the proper type and length, see “Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts” in the Index.

1. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from the windshield.

2. Push the release lever and slide the wiper assembly toward the driver’s side of the vehicle.

3. Install a new blade by reversing Steps 1 and 2.

6-42

Wiper Blade Element Replacement

To replace the wiper blade element, follow these steps:

1. Locate the heel end of the wiper blade assembly that has the two notches held by the wiper blade claw.

3. At the heel end of the wiper blade assembly, notched end of blade element last, slide the blade element into the blade claw sets. The plastic retainer caps will be forced off as the element is fully inserted.

Make sure that all the claw sets are properly engaged in the slots of the blade element.

4. Install the wiper blade assembly on the wiper arm.

For information on wiper blade replacement length and type, see “Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts” in the Index.

2. Hold the wiper blade assembly with one hand and pull the element gently with the other hand.

(Replacement blade elements have three plastic caps which retain two metal strips. Do not remove these caps before the element is installed.)

6-43

Tires

Your new vehicle comes with high

quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions about your tire warranty and where to obtain service, see your Pontiac Warranty booklet for details.

CAUTION:

Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous.

D Overloading your tires can cause

overheating as a result of too much friction.

You could have an air

out and a serious accident. See “Loading Your Vehicle” in the Index.

CAUTION: (Continued)

CAUTION: (Continued)

D Underinflated tires pose the same danger as

overloaded tires. The resulting accident could cause serious injury. Check all tires frequently to maintain the recommended pressure. Tire pressure should be checked when your tires are cold.

D Overinflated tires are more likely to be

cut, punctured or broken by a sudden impact

--

such as when you hit a pothole.

Keep tires at the recommended pressure.

D Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your

tread is badly worn, or if your tires have been damaged, replace them.

See “Inflation

--

Tire Pressure” in this section for inflation pressure adjustment for higher speed driving.

6-44

Inflation -- Tire Pressure

The Tire

-

Loading Information label, which is on the rear edge of the driver’s door, shows the correct inflation pressures for your tires when they’re cold.

“Cold” means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

If you’ll be driving at high speeds (e.g., speeds of

100 mph (160 km/h) or higher), where it is legal, set the cold inflation pressure to the maximum inflation pressure shown on the tire sidewall, or to 38 psi

(265 kPa), whichever is lower. See the example below.

When you end this high

speed driving, return to the cold inflation pressure shown on the Tire

-

Loading

Information label.

Example:

You’ll find maximum load and inflation pressure molded on the tire’s sidewall, in small letters, near the rim flange. It will read something like this: Maximum load 690 kg (1521 lbs.) @ 300 kPa (44 psi) Max. Press.

For this example, you would set the inflation pressure for high

speed driving at 38 psi (265 kPa).

NOTICE:

Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation or overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires don’t have enough air (underinflation), you can get the following:

D Too much flexing

D Too much heat

D Tire overloading

D Bad wear

D Bad handling

D Bad fuel economy.

If your tires have too much air (overinflation), you can get the following:

D Unusual wear

D Bad handling

D Rough ride

D Needless damage from road hazards.

6-45

When to Check

Check your tires once a month or more.

Don’t forget your compact spare tire. It should be at

60 psi (420 kPa).

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket

type gage to check tire pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they’re underinflated.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.

Tire Inspection and Rotation

Tires should be rotated every 6,000 to 8,000 miles

(10 000 to 13 000 km). Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires as soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels. See “When It’s Time for New Tires” and

“Wheel Replacement” later in this section for more information.

The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation is the most important. See “Scheduled

Maintenance Services” in the Index for scheduled rotation intervals.

If you don’t have P245/50ZR16 Goodyear Eagle GS

-

C tires or P275/40ZR17 Goodyear Eagle F1

-

GS tires, use the rotation pattern shown above for your tires.

6-46

If you have P245/50ZR16 Goodyear Eagle GS

-

C tires or P275/40ZR17 Goodyear Eagle F1

-

GS tires, they must roll in a certain direction for the best overall performance. The direction is shown by an arrow on the sidewall. Because these tires are directional, they should be rotated as shown here. These tires should only be moved from front to rear and rear to front on the same side of the vehicle.

Don’t include the compact spare tire in your tire rotation.

After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire

-

Loading

Information label. Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” in the Index.

CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose after a time. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. When you change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to get all the rust or dirt off.

(See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index.)

6-47

When It’s Time for New Tires

One way to tell when it’s time for new tires is to check the treadwear indicators, which will appear when your tires have only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or less of tread remaining.

You need a new tire if any of the following statements are true:

D You can see the indicators at three or more places around the tire.

D You can see cord or fabric showing through the tire’s rubber.

D The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.

D The tire has a bump, bulge or split.

D The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that can’t be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage.

Buying New Tires

To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look at the Tire

-

Loading Information label.

The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec) number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires, get ones with that same TPC Spec number. That way your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed to give proper endurance, handling, speed rating, traction, ride and other things during normal service on your vehicle. If your tires have an all

season tread design, the TPC number will be followed by an “MS”

(for mud and snow).

If you ever replace your tires with those not having a

TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size, load range, speed rating and construction type

(bias, bias

belted or radial) as your original tires.

6-48

CAUTION:

Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes or types

(radial and bias

belted tires), the vehicle may not handle properly, and you could have a crash.

Using tires of different sizes may also cause damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the same size and type tires on all wheels.

It’s all right to drive with your compact spare, though. It was developed for use on your vehicle.

CAUTION:

If you use bias

ply tires on your vehicle, the wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only radial

ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

The following information relates to the system developed by the United States National Highway

Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by treadwear, traction and temperature performance. (This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.) The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system does not apply to deep tread, winter

type snow tires, space

saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some limited

production tires.

While the tires available on General Motors passenger cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these grades, they must also conform to Federal safety requirements and additional General Motors Tire

Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.

6-49

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half

(1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction

--

AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,

B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight

ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature

--

A, B, C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.

The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades

B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

6-50

Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance

The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance.

Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are not needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels may need to be rebalanced.

Wheel Replacement

Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.

Each new wheel should have the same load

carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces.

If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle.

CAUTION:

Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous.

It could affect the braking and handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you lose control. You could have a collision in which you or others could be injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.

NOTICE:

The wrong wheel can also cause problems with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain clearance to the body and chassis.

See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index for more information.

6-51

Used Replacement Wheels

CAUTION:

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used or how far it’s been driven. It could fail suddenly and cause an accident. If you have to replace a wheel, use a new GM original equipment wheel.

Tire Chains

NOTICE:

If your vehicle has P235/55R16, P245/50ZR16 or

P275/40ZR17 size tires, don’t use tire chains.

They can damage your vehicle because there’s not enough clearance.

NOTICE: (Continued)

NOTICE: (Continued)

Use another type of traction device only if its manufacturer recommends it for use on your vehicle and tire size combination and road conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s instructions. To help avoid damage to your vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the device if it’s contacting your vehicle, and don’t spin your wheels.

If you do find traction devices that will fit, install them on the rear tires.

If you have other tires, use tire chains only where legal and only when you must. Use only SAE

Class “S” type chains that are the proper size for your tires. Install them on the rear tires and tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends securely fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear the chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten them. If the contact continues, slow down until it stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with chains on will damage your vehicle.

6-52

Appearance Care

Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some are toxic. Others can burst into flame if you strike a match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space.

When you use anything from a container to clean your vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s warnings and instructions. And always open your doors or windows when you’re cleaning the inside.

Never use these to clean your vehicle:

D Gasoline

D Benzene

D Naphtha

D Carbon Tetrachloride

D Acetone

D Paint Thinner

D Turpentine

D Lacquer Thinner

D Nail Polish Remover

They can all be hazardous

--

some more than others

--

and they can all damage your vehicle, too.

Don’t use any of these unless this manual says you can.

In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:

D Alcohol

D Laundry Soap

D Bleach

D Reducing Agents

Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle

Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and painted surfaces with a clean, damp cloth.

Cleaning of Fabric/Carpet

Your dealer has two cleaners, Multi

-

Purpose Interior

Cleaner and Capture Non

-

Solvent Dry Spot and Soil

Remover for cleaning fabric and carpet. They will clean normal spots and stains very well. You can get

GM

approved cleaning products from your dealer.

(See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.)

6-53

Here are some cleaning tips:

D Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.

D Clean up stains as soon as you can

--

before they set.

D Carefully scrape off any excess stain.

D Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean area often. A soft brush may be used if stains are stubborn.

D If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning, clean the entire area immediately or it will set.

Using Multi-Purpose Interior Cleaner on Fabric

1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt.

2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section. Mask surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.

3. Mix powdered cleaner following the directions on the container label to form thick suds.

4. Use suds only and apply with a clean sponge.

Don’t saturate the material and don’t rub it roughly.

5. As soon as you’ve cleaned the section, use a sponge to remove the suds.

6. Wipe cleaned area with a clean, damp towel or cloth.

7. Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry.

6-54

Special Fabric Cleaning Problems

Stains caused by such things as catsup, coffee (black), egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine and blood can be removed as follows:

1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the soiled area with cool water.

2. If a stain remains, follow the multi

purpose interior cleaner instructions described earlier.

3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine, treat the area with a water/baking soda solution:

1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml) of lukewarm water.

4. Let dry.

Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows:

1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.

2. First, clean with cool water and allow to dry completely.

3. If a stain remains, follow instructions for

Multi

-

Purpose Interior Cleaner.

Cleaning Vinyl

Use warm water and a clean cloth.

D Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt.

You may have to do it more than once.

D Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if you don’t get them off quickly. Use a clean cloth and a vinyl/leather cleaner. See your dealer for this product.

Cleaning Leather

Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let the leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.

D For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner. See your dealer for this product.

D Never use oils, varnishes, solvent

based or abrasive cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.

D Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the finish, it can harm the leather.

Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel

Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it difficult to see through the windshield under certain conditions.

Cleaning Interior Plastic Components

Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the surface finish.

Care of Safety Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

CAUTION:

Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it may severely weaken them. In a crash, they might not be able to provide adequate protection.

Clean safety belts only with mild soap and lukewarm water.

6-55

Cleaning Glass Surfaces

Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or a liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass.

(See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.)

Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass, because they may cause scratches. Avoid placing decals on the inside rear window, since they may have to be scraped off later. If abrasive cleaners are used on the inside of the rear window, an electric defogger element may be damaged.

Any temporary license should not be attached across the defogger grid.

Cleaning the Outside of the

Windshield and Wiper Blades

If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running, wax, sap or other material may be on the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with GM

Windshield Cleaner, Bon Ami

R

Powder (non

scratching glass cleaning powder), GM Part No. 1050011. The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse it with water.

Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades and affect their performance. Clean the blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full

strength windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade with water.

Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary; replace blades that look worn.

Weatherstrips

Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every six months. During very cold, damp weather more frequent application may be required. (See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.)

Cleaning a Removable Roof Panel

Special care is necessary when cleaning, removing and/or storing the roof panel.

D Flush with water to remove dust and dirt, then dry the panel.

D Clean the panel with GM Glass Cleaner. Leave the cleaner on the panel for one minute, then wipe the panel with a soft, lint

free cloth.

D Don’t use abrasive cleaning materials.

6-56

Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle

The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth of color, gloss retention and durability.

Washing Your Vehicle

The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.

Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.

Use a car washing soap. Don’t use strong soaps or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well, removing all soap residue completely. You can get

GM

approved cleaning products from your dealer.

(See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.)

Don’t use cleaning agents that are petroleum based, or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all

cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.

High pressure car washes may cause water to enter your vehicle.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses

Use lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.

Follow instructions under “Washing Your Vehicle.”

Finish Care

Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint finish. You can get GM

approved cleaning products from your dealer. (See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.)

Your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish.

The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are non

abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

NOTICE:

Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks.

6-57

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary, use non

abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible.

Cleaning Your Convertible Top

Your convertible top should be cleaned often. If you use an automatic car wash, use one with water jets and hanging cloths. High pressure car washes may cause water to enter your vehicle.

When you hand wash the top, do it in partial shade.

Use a mild soap, lukewarm water and a soft sponge.

A chamois or cloth may leave lint on the top, and a brush can chafe the threads in the top fabric. Don’t use detergents, harsh cleaners, solvents or bleaching agents.

Wet the entire vehicle and wash the top evenly to avoid spots or rings. Let the soap remain on the fabric for a few minutes. When the top is really dirty, use a mild foam

type cleaner. Thoroughly rinse the entire vehicle, then let the top dry in direct sunlight.

To protect the convertible top:

D After you wash the vehicle, make sure the top is completely dry before you lower it.

D Don’t get any cleaner on the vehicle’s painted finish; it could leave streaks.

D If you decide to go through an automatic car wash, ask the manager if the equipment could damage your top.

6-58

Cleaning Aluminum or

Chrome

-

Plated Wheels (If Equipped)

Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel.

A wax may then be applied.

The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners, cleaners with acid or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because you could damage the surface. Do not use chrome polish on any wheels other than chrome

plated wheels.

Use chrome polish only on chrome

plated wheels, but avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off immediately after application.

Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes. These brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.

Cleaning Tires

To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with a tire cleaner.

NOTICE:

When applying a tire dressing always take care to wipe off any overspray or splash from all painted surfaces on the body or wheels of the vehicle.

Petroleum

based products may damage the paint finish and tires.

Sheet Metal Damage

If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop applies anti

corrosion material to the parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection.

Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.

6-59

Finish Damage

Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode quickly and may develop into a major repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch

up materials available from your dealer or other service outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your dealer’s body and paint shop.

Underbody Maintenance

Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control can collect on the underbody. If these are not removed, accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur on the underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust system even though they have corrosion protection.

At least every spring, flush these materials from the underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud and other debris can collect. Dirt packed in closed areas of the frame should be loosened before being flushed.

Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can do this for you.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy, ringlet

shaped discolorations, and small irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface.

Although no defect in the paint job causes this, Pontiac will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within

12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase, whichever occurs first.

6-60

GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials

PART NUMBER

994954

1050172

1050173

1050174

1050214

1050427

1052918**

1052925

1052929

1052930

12345721

12345725

12377964*

12377966*

12377984*

SIZE DESCRIPTION

23 in. x 25 in.

Polishing Cloth – Wax Treated

16 oz. (0.473 L)

16 oz. (0.473 L)

USAGE

Exterior polishing cloth

Tar and Road Oil Remover Removes tar, road oil and asphalt

Chrome Cleaner and Polish Use on chrome, stainless steel, nickel, copper and brass

16 oz. (0.473 L) White Sidewall Tire Cleaner

32 oz. (0.946 L) Vinyl Cleaner

23 oz. (0.680 L) Glass Cleaner

8 oz. (0.237 L)

16 oz. (0.473 L)

16 oz. (0.473 L)

8 oz. (0.237 L)

2.5 sq. ft.

12 oz. (0.354 L)

Armor All t Protectant

Multi-Purpose Interior

Cleaner

Wheel Cleaner

Capture Dry Spot Remover

Synthetic Chamois

Removes soil and black marks from whitewalls

Cleans vinyl tops, upholstery and convertible tops

Removes dirt, grime, smoke and fingerprints

Protects leather, wood, acrylics, Plexiglas t, plastic, rubber and vinyl

Cleans carpets, seats, interior trim, door panels and floor mats

Spray on and rinse with water

16 oz. (0.473 L)

16 oz. (0.473 L)

16 oz. (0.473 L)

Silicone Tire Shine

Finish Enhancer

Cleaner Wax

Surface Cleaner

Attracts, absorbs and removes soils on fabric

Shines vehicle without scratching

Spray on tire shine

Removes dust, fingerprints and surface contaminants

Removes light scratches and oxidation and protects finish

Removes contaminants, blemishes and swirl marks

See your General Motors Parts Department for these products.

See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.

* For exterior use only.

** Not recommended for use on instrument panels.

6-61

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and the certificates of title and registration.

Engine Identification

The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This code will help you identify your engine, specifications and replacement parts.

Service Parts Identification Label

You’ll find this label located on the rear edge of the driver’s door. It’s very helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this label is:

D your VIN,

D the model designation,

D paint information and

D a list of all production options and special equipment.

Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.

6-62

Electrical System

Add-On Electrical Equipment

NOTICE:

Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle unless you check with your dealer first. Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. Some add

on electrical equipment can keep other components from working as they should.

Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to add anything electrical to your vehicle, see “Servicing

Your Air Bag

-

Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.

Headlamps

The headlamp wiring is protected by a circuit breaker.

An electrical overload will cause the lamps to go on and off, or in some cases to remain off. If this happens, have your headlamp wiring checked right away.

Windshield Wipers

The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical problem and not snow, etc., be sure to get it fixed.

Power Windows and Other Power Options

Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other power accessories. When the current load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away.

6-63

Fuses and Circuit Breakers

The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers and fusible thermal links in the wiring itself. This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused by electrical problems.

There are three fuse centers on your vehicle.

The main fuse block is located behind a cover on the left side of your instrument panel.

The other two are located in the engine compartment.

Open the cover on the boxes to expose the fuses.

Look at the silver

colored band inside the fuse. If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of the correct size.

If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have a spare fuse, you can borrow one. Just pick some feature of your car that you can get along without

--

like the radio or cigarette lighter

--

and use its fuse, if it is the size you need. Replace it as soon as you can.

6-64

Main Fuse Block

Fuse Usage

STOP/HAZARD Hazard Flashers, Brake

Switch Assembly

TURN B/U Traction Control Switch, Back/Up

Lamp Switch, Turn Flasher,

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)

Module

Fuse

STG WHEEL

CNTRL

Usage

Steering Wheel Controls

RADIO ACCY Delco Monsoon Radio Amplifier,

Power Antenna, Remote CD

Player (Hatch)

TAIL LPS

HVAC

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)

Module, Headlamp Switch

HVAC Selector Switch, Rear

Defogger Switch/Timer

PWR ACCY Parking Lamp Relay, Hatch

Release Relay, Power Mirror

Switch, Radio, Shock Sensor,

Instrument Cluster

COURTESY

GAUGES

AIR BAG

Body Control Module (BCM)

Body Control Module (BCM),

Brake

-

Transmission Shift

Interlock (BTSI), Instrument

Cluster, Daytime Running Lamps

(DRL) Module

Air Bag

6-65

Fuse

CIG/ACCY

Usage

Cigarette Lighter, Data Link

Connector (DLC), Auxiliary

Accessory Wire

DEFOG/SEATS Rear Defogger Switch/Timer,

Rear Defogger Timer/Relay,

Power Seats

IGN Aftermarket Use Only

STG WHEEL

CNTRL

Steering Wheel Controls

WIPER/WASH Wiper Motor Assembly,

Wiper/Washer Switch

BATT

WINDOWS

Aftermarket Use Only

Power Windows Switch

(Right

-

Hand, Left

-

Hand),

Express

-

Down Module,

Convertible Top Switch

Fuse

IP DIMMER

ACCY

RADIO

Usage

Door Illumination Lamp

(Right

-

Hand, Left

-

Hand),

Headlamp Switch, Fog Lamp

Switch, Instrument Cluster, HVAC

Control Assembly, PRNDL

Illumination Lamp, Ashtray Lamp,

Radio, Rear Window Defogger

Switch/Timer, Traction Control

Switch (TCS), Convertible

Top Switch

Aftermarket Use Only

Body Control Module (BCM),

Radio, Amplifier, Steering Wheel

Controls

-

Radio

6-66

Underhood Electrical Center

Fuse and Relay Center 1

Fuse Usage

ABS BAT SOL Anti

-

Lock Brake System

TCS BAT

COOL FAN

Traction Control System

Cooling Fan Control

Fuse

PCM BAT

FUEL PUMP

AIR PUMP

Usage

Powertrain Control Module

(PCM)

Fuel Pump

A.I.R. Pump Relay and

Bleed Valve

Left Headlamp Door Module

Right Headlamp Door Module

LH HDLP DR

RH HDLP DR

HORN

ABS BAT

-

1

Horn Relay

Anti

-

Lock Brake System Module

H/L DR HORN Horn and Headlamp Doors

ABS BAT

-

2 Anti

-

Lock Brake and Traction

Control System

COOL FAN Cooling Fan Relays

Relay Description

FOG LAMP

HORN

FAN #3

FAN #2

FAN #1

Fog Lamps

Horn

Cooling Fans

Cooling Fans

Cooling Fans

6-67

Fuse

INJ

-

2

INJ

-

1

Fuse and Relay Center 2

Usage

Fuel Injectors (Not used for V6)

(LH Injectors for V8 and

Ignition Module)

Fuel Injectors (All for V6)

(RH Injectors for V8 and

Ignition Module)

Fuse

ENG SEN

STRTR

ABS IGN

PCM IGN

ETC

ENG CTRL

A/C CRUISE

ENG CTRL

Usage

Mass Air Flow Sensor, Heated

Oxygen Sensor, Skip Shift

Solenoid (V8 Only), Reverse

Lockout Solenoid, Brake Switch

Powertrain Control Module

(PCM), Clutch Pedal Switch

Anti

-

Lock Brake System Module

Powertrain Control Module

(PCM)

Electronic Throttle Control

(V6 Only)

Ignition Module (V6 Only),

Automatic Transmission, Charcoal

Canister Purge Solenoid

Air Conditioning Compressor

Relay, Cruise Control Switches and Module

Engine Controls, Fuel Pump,

Powertrain Control Module

(PCM), A.I.R. Pump and

Cooling Fans

6-68

Fuse

I/P

-

1

IGN

I/P

-

2

Relay

Blank

AIR PUMP

A/C COMP

FUEL PUMP

STARTER

IGN

Usage

HVAC Blower Control and Relay

Ignition Switch, Relay and Starter

Enable Relay

Instrument Panel Fuse Center

Description

Not Used

Air Pump

Air Conditioning Compressor

Fuel Pump

Starter

Engine Controls, Cruise Controls,

Air Conditioning

Replacement Bulbs

Back

up

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Center High

-

Mounted Stoplamp

. . . . . . . . . . .

3155

921

Headlamp

High Beam

Low Beam

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4701

4703

Sidemarker Lamp

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Taillamp Only

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tail/Stop/Turn Lamps

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

194

3057

For service information on other bulbs, contact your dealer’s service department.

Capacities and Specifications

The following approximate capacities are given in

English and metric conversions. Please refer to

“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the

Index for more information.

Air Conditioning

[

. . . . . . . . . . . . See the refrigerant

information label under the hood.

Automatic Transmission

Drain and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.0 quarts (4.7 L)

Overhaul

3800 V6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.7L V8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.8 quarts (8.3 L)

10.8 quarts (10.2 L)

6-69

Cooling System

3800 V6

With Manual Transmission

With Automatic Transmission

5.7L V8

. . . . 11.6 quarts (11.0 L)

. . 11.4 quarts (10.8 L)

With Manual Transmission

With Automatic Transmission

. . . . 11.9 quarts (11.3 L)

. . 11.8 quarts (11.2 L)

Crankcase

Oil and Filter Change

3800 V6

5.7L V8

Fuel Tank

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.5 quarts (4.3 L)

5.5 quarts (5.2 L)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.8 gallons (63.6 L)

Manual Transmission

Five

-

Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Six

-

Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear Axle Lubricant

. . . . . . . . .

3.4 quarts (3.2 L)

4.0 quarts (3.8 L)

1.75 quarts (1.7 L)

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in this manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine Specifications

Type

VIN Engine Code K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3800 V6

VIN Engine Code G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7L V8

Fuel Delivery

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Valve Arrangement

Fuel Injection

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In

-

Head

Displacement

3800 V6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 cubic inches (3791 cc)

5.7L V8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 cubic inches (5662 cc)

Firing Order

3800 V6

5.7L V8

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1

-

6

-

5

-

4

-

3

-

2

1

-

8

-

7

-

2

-

6

-

5

-

4

-

3

Wheel Nut Torque

. . . . . . . . . . 100 lb

ft (140 N·m)

Thermostat Temperature Specification

3800 V6

5.7L V8

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

195

_F (91_C)

180

_F (82_C)

6-70

Normal Maintenance

Replacement Parts

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

Battery

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A917C

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

-

60

Engine Oil Filter

3800 V6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PF47

5.7L V8

Fuel Filter

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PF44

3800 V6

5.7L V8

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

G627

GF578

PCV Valve

3800 V6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.7L V8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CV892C

CV948C

Radiator Cap

Spark Plug

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RC24

3800 V6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.7L V8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

·41

-

921 (0.060 inch Gap)

·41

-

952 (0.060 inch Gap)

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement

Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hook

Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.0 inches (60.1 cm)

Vehicle Dimensions

Length

Firebird/Formula

Trans Am/GT

Width

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

193.7 inches (491.1 cm)

74.4 inches (189.0 cm)

Height

. . . . . . . . 193.3 inches (491.1 cm)

Coupe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Convertible

52.0 inches (132.2 cm)

Firebird/Formula

Trans AM/GT

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

52.7 inches (134.0 cm)

52.4 inches (133.1 cm)

Wheelbase

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front Tread . . . . . . . . . . . . .

101.1 inches (256.6 cm)

60.7 inches (154.2 cm)

Rear Tread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60.6 inches (154.0 cm)

6-71

Section 7 Maintenance Schedule

This section covers the maintenance required for your vehicle. Your vehicle needs these services to retain its safety, dependability and emission control performance.

7

-

2

7

-

4

Introduction

Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services

7

7

-

5 Scheduled Maintenance

-

17 Part B: Owner Checks and Services

7

-

21 Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections

7

-

23 Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

7

-

25 Part E: Maintenance Record

7-

7-1

Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan?

The Plan supplements your new vehicle warranties.

See your Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet, or

your dealer for details.

Introduction

Your Vehicle and the Environment

Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the environment. All recommended maintenance procedures are important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition, please maintain your vehicle properly.

Maintenance Requirements

Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections and recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary to keep your vehicle in good working condition. Any damage caused by failure to follow recommended maintenance may not be covered by warranty.

7-2

How This Section is Organized

This maintenance schedule is divided into five parts:

“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services” shows what to have done and how often. Some of these services can be complex, so unless you are technically qualified and have the necessary equipment, you should let your dealer’s service department or another qualified service center do these jobs.

CAUTION:

Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can be seriously injured. Do your own maintenance work only if you have the required know

how and the proper tools and equipment for the job.

If you have any doubt, have a qualified technician do the work.

“Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells you what should be checked and when. It also explains what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition.

“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections” explains important inspections that your dealer’s service department or another qualified service center should perform.

“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” lists some recommended products necessary to help keep your vehicle properly maintained. These products, or their equivalents, should be used whether you do the work yourself or have it done.

“Part E: Maintenance Record” is a place for you to record and keep track of the maintenance performed on your vehicle. Keep your maintenance receipts. They may be needed to qualify your vehicle for warranty repairs.

If you want to get the service information, see “Service and Owner Publications” in the Index.

7-3

Part A: Scheduled

Maintenance Services

Using Your Maintenance Schedule

We at General Motors want to help you keep your vehicle in good working condition. But we don’t know exactly how you’ll drive it. You may drive very short distances only a few times a week. Or you may drive long distances all the time in very hot, dusty weather. You may use your vehicle in making deliveries. Or you may drive it to work, to do errands or in many other ways.

Because of all the different ways people use their vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more frequent checks and replacements. So please read the following and note how you drive. If you have any questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition, see your dealer.

This part tells you the maintenance services you should have done and when you should schedule them. If you go to your dealer for your service needs, you’ll know that GM

trained and supported service people will perform the work using genuine GM parts.

The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in Part D.

Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses these. All parts should be replaced and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone else drives the vehicle.

This schedule is for vehicles that:

D carry passengers and cargo within recommended limits. You will find these limits on your vehicle’s

Tire

-

Loading Information label. See “Loading Your

Vehicle” in the Index.

D are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal driving limits.

D use the recommended fuel. See “Fuel” in the Index.

7-4

Scheduled Maintenance

The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles

(166 000 km) should be performed after 100,000 miles

(166 000 km) at the same intervals. The services shown at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) should be performed at the same interval after 150,000 miles (240 000 km).

See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Periodic

Maintenance Inspections” following.

Footnotes

[ The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the

California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however, urge that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded.

+ A good time to check your brakes is during tire rotation. See “Brake System Inspection” under

“Periodic Maintenance Inspections” in Part C of this schedule.

7-5

Scheduled Maintenance

Engine Oil Scheduled Maintenance

Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the

GM Oil Life System

t (or every 12 months,

whichever occurs first). Reset the system. The system will show you when to change the oil

--

usually between

3,000 miles (5 000 km) and 7,500 miles (12 500 km) since your last oil change. Under severe conditions, the indicator may come on before 3,000 miles (5 000 km).

Never drive your vehicle more than 7,500 miles

(12 500 km) or 12 months without an oil and filter change.

The system won’t detect dust in the oil. So if you drive in a dusty area, be sure to change your oil and filter every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or sooner if the OIL

CHANGE light appears. Remember to reset the Oil Life

System when the oil and filter have been changed.

See “Oil Life System” in the Index for information on resetting.

An Emission Control Service.

7-6

Scheduled Maintenance

7-7

Scheduled Maintenance

7-8

Scheduled Maintenance

7,500 Miles (12 500 km)

j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

15,000 Miles (25 000 km)

j Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions.

Replace filter if necessary.

An Emission Control Service. (See footnote

[.) j Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions:

– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches

90

_F (32_C) or higher.

– In hilly or mountainous terrain.

– When doing frequent trailer towing.

– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.

If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).

j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

DATE

ACTUAL

MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE

ACTUAL

MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

7-9

Scheduled Maintenance

22,500 Miles (37 500 km)

j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

30,000 Miles (50 000 km)

j Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions:

– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches

90

_F (32_C) or higher.

– In hilly or mountainous terrain.

– When doing frequent trailer towing.

– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.

If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).

j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) j Replace engine air cleaner filter.

An Emission Control Service.

DATE

ACTUAL

MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE

ACTUAL

MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

7-10

Scheduled Maintenance

37,500 Miles (62 500 km)

j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

45,000 Miles (75 000 km)

j Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions.

Replace filter if necessary.

An Emission Control Service. (See footnote

[.) j Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions:

– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches

90

_F (32_C) or higher.

– In hilly or mountainous terrain.

– When doing frequent trailer towing.

– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.

If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).

j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

DATE

ACTUAL

MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE

ACTUAL

MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

7-11

Scheduled Maintenance

50,000 Miles (83 000 km)

j If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe conditions listed previously and, therefore, haven’t changed your automatic transmission fluid, change both the fluid and filter. Manual transmission fluid doesn’t require change.

52,500 Miles (87 500 km)

j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

DATE

ACTUAL

MILEAGE

DATE

ACTUAL

MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

SERVICED BY:

60,000 Miles (100 000 km)

j Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions:

– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches

90

_F (32_C) or higher.

– In hilly or mountainous terrain.

– When doing frequent trailer towing.

– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.

If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).

j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

7-12

DATE

ACTUAL

MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

Scheduled Maintenance

j Inspect engine accessory drive belt.

An Emission Control Service. j Replace engine air cleaner filter.

An Emission Control Service.

67,500 Miles (112 500 km)

j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

DATE

ACTUAL

MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

75,000 Miles (125 000 km)

j Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions.

Replace filter if necessary.

An Emission Control Service. (See footnote

[.) j Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions:

– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches

90

_F (32_C) or higher.

– In hilly or mountainous terrain.

(Continued)

DATE

ACTUAL

MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

7-13

Scheduled Maintenance

75,000 Miles (125 000 km) (Continued)

– When doing frequent trailer towing.

– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.

If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).

j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

82,500 Miles (137 500 km)

j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

90,000 Miles (150 000 km)

j Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions:

– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches

90

_F (32_C) or higher.

– In hilly or mountainous terrain.

DATE

ACTUAL

MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE

ACTUAL

MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

7-14

Scheduled Maintenance

– When doing frequent trailer towing.

– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.

If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).

j Replace engine air cleaner filter.

An Emission Control Service. j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

97,500 Miles (162 500 km)

j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

DATE

ACTUAL

MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

100,000 Miles (166 000 km)

j Inspect spark plug wires.

An Emission Control Service. j Replace spark plugs.

An Emission Control Service.

j If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe service conditions listed previously and, therefore, haven’t changed your automatic transmission fluid, change both the fluid and filter. Manual transmission fluid doesn’t require change.

DATE

ACTUAL

MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

7-15

Scheduled Maintenance

150,000 Miles (240 000 km)

j Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every 60 months since last service, whichever occurs first). See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for what to use.

Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap.

An Emission Control Service.

DATE

ACTUAL

MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

7-16

Part B: Owner Checks and Services

Listed in this part are owner checks and services which should be performed at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety, dependability and emission control performance of your vehicle.

Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.

Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown in Part D.

At Each Fuel Fill

It is important for you or a service station attendant to perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level Check

Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if necessary.

See “Engine Oil” in the Index for further details.

Engine Coolant Level Check

Check the engine coolant level and add DEX

-

COOL

R coolant mixture if necessary. See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for further details.

Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check

Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary. See “Windshield Washer Fluid” in the

Index for further details.

At Least Once a Month

Tire Inflation Check

Make sure tires are inflated to the correct pressures.

Don’t forget to check your spare tire. See “Tires” in the Index for further details.

Cassette Deck Service

Clean cassette deck. Cleaning should be done every

50 hours of tape play. See “Audio Systems” in the

Index for further details.

At Least Twice a Year

Restraint System Check

Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced.

7-17

Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings, and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.)

Wiper Blade Check

Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replace blade inserts that appear worn or damaged or that streak or miss areas of the windshield. Also see “Wiper Blades,

Cleaning” in the Index.

Weatherstrip Lubrication

Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold, damp weather more frequent application may be required. (See

“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.)

Manual Transmission Check

Check the transmission fluid level; add if needed. See

“Manual Transmission Fluid” in the Index. Check for leaks. A fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss. Have the system inspected and repaired if needed.

Automatic Transmission Check

Check the transmission fluid level; add if needed. See

“Automatic Transmission Fluid” in the Index. A fluid loss may indicate a problem. Check the system and repair if needed.

Hydraulic Clutch System Check

Check the fluid level in the clutch reservoir. See

“Hydraulic Clutch Fluid” in the Index. A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and repaired at once.

At Least Once a Year

Key Lock Cylinders Service

Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant specified in Part D.

Body Lubrication Service

Lubricate all body door hinges. Also lubricate all hinges and latches, including those for the hood, headlamp door assemblies, rear compartment, console doors and any folding seat hardware. Part D tells you what to use.

More frequent lubrication may be required when exposed to a corrosive environment.

7-18

Starter Switch Check Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control

System Check

CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, the vehicle could move suddenly. If it does, you or others could be injured. Follow the steps below.

CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, the vehicle could move suddenly. If it does, you or others could be injured. Follow the steps below.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room around the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake (see “Parking

Brake” in the Index if necessary) and the regular brake.

NOTE: Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts.

3. On automatic transmission vehicles, try to start the engine in each gear. The starter should work only in

PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If the starter works in any other position, your vehicle needs service.

On manual transmission vehicles, put the shift lever in NEUTRAL (N), push the clutch down halfway and try to start the engine. The starter should work only when the clutch is pushed down all the way to the floor. If the starter works when the clutch isn’t pushed all the way down, your vehicle needs service.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake (see “Parking Brake” in the Index if necessary).

NOTE: Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if the vehicle begins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn the key to the RUN position, but don’t start the engine. Without applying the regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of

PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out of PARK (P), your vehicle needs service.

7-19

Ignition Transmission Lock Check

While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn the ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position.

D With an automatic transmission, the key should turn to LOCK only when the shift lever is in PARK (P).

D With a manual transmission, the key should turn to

LOCK only when you press the key release button.

On all vehicles, the key should come out only in LOCK.

Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission

PARK (P) Mechanism Check

CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, your vehicle could begin to move. You or others could be injured and property could be damaged. Make sure there is room in front of your vehicle in case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should the vehicle begin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the parking brake.

D To check the parking brake’s holding ability:

With the engine running and transmission in

NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking brake only.

D To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:

With the engine running, shift to PARK (P).

Then release the parking brake followed by the regular brake.

Underbody Flushing Service

At least every spring, use plain water to flush any corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris can collect.

7-20

Part C: Periodic

Maintenance Inspections

Listed in this part are inspections and services which should be performed at least twice a year (for instance, each spring and fall). You should let your dealer’s

service department or other qualified service center do these jobs. Make sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.

Proper procedures to perform these services may be found in a service manual. See “Service and Owner

Publications” in the Index.

Steering and Suspension Inspection

Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steering lines and hoses for proper hook

up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.

Exhaust System Inspection

Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body near the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged, missing or out

of

position parts as well as open seams, holes, loose connections or other conditions which could cause a heat build

up in the floor pan or could let exhaust fumes into the vehicle. See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.

Engine Cooling System Inspection

Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes, fittings and clamps; replace as needed. Clean the outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test of the cooling system and pressure cap is recommended at least once a year.

7-21

Throttle System Inspection

(Except 3800 Series V6 Engine)

Inspect the throttle system for interference or binding, and for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as needed. Replace any components that have high effort or excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator and cruise control cables.

Rear Axle Service

Check the gear lubricant level in the rear axle and add if needed. See “Rear Axle” in the Index. A fluid loss may indicate a problem. Check the axle and repair it if needed.

Brake System Inspection

Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and hoses for proper hook

up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers, parking brake, etc. Check parking brake adjustment. You may need to have your brakes inspected more often if your driving habits or conditions result in frequent braking.

7-22

Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

NOTE: Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number or specification may be obtained from your dealer.

USAGE

Engine Oil

FLUID/LUBRICANT

Engine Oil with the American

Petroleum Institute Certified

For Gasoline Engines starburst symbol of the proper viscosity.

To determine the preferred viscosity for your vehicle’s engine, see “Engine Oil” in the Index.

Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only GM

Goodwrench

R

DEX

Havoline

R

DEX

-

-

COOL

COOL

R

R

or

Coolant.

Hydraulic

Brake System

See “Engine Coolant” in the Index.

Delco Supreme 11

R

Brake Fluid

(GM Part No. 12377967 or equivalent DOT

-

3 Brake Fluid).

USAGE

Windshield

Washer Solvent

Hydraulic

Clutch System

Power Steering

System

Manual

Transmission

Automatic

Transmission

Key Lock

Cylinders

Clutch Linkage

Pivot Points

FLUID/LUBRICANT

GM Optikleen

R

Washer Solvent

(GM Part No. 1051515) or equivalent.

Hydraulic Clutch Fluid

(GM Part No. 12345347 or equivalent DOT

-

3 Brake Fluid).

GM Power Steering Fluid

(GM Part No. 1052884

-

1 pint,

1050017

-

1 quart, or equivalent).

DEXRON

R

-

III Automatic

Transmission Fluid.

DEXRON

R

-

III Automatic

Transmission Fluid.

Multi

-

Purpose Lubricant,

Superlube

R

(GM Part

No. 12346241 or equivalent).

Engine Oil.

7-23

USAGE

Floor

Shift Linkage

Rear Axle

(Standard

Differential)

Rear Axle

(Limited

-

Slip

Differential)

FLUID/LUBRICANT

Lubriplate

R

Lubricant Aerosol

(GM Part No. 12346293 or equivalent) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI # 2

Category LB or GC

-

LB.

SAE 75W

-

90 Synthetic Axle

Lubricant (GM Part No. 12378261) or equivalent meeting GM

Specification 9986115.

SAE 75W

-

90 Synthetic Axle

Lubricant (GM Part No. 12378261) or equivalent meeting GM

Specification 9986115. With a complete drain and refill add

4 ounces (118 ml) of Limited

-

Slip

Axle Lubricant Additive (GM Part

No. 1052358 or equivalent) where required. See “Rear Axle” in the Index.

USAGE

Hood Latch

Assembly,

Secondary Latch,

Pivots, Spring

Anchor and

Release Pawl

Hood and

Door Hinges

Weatherstrip

Conditioning

FLUID/LUBRICANT

Lubriplate

R

Lubricant Aerosol

(GM Part No. 12346293 or equivalent) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI # 2,

Category LB or GC

-

LB.

Multi

-

Purpose Lubricant,

Superlube

R

(GM Part

No. 12346241 or equivalent).

Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM

Part No. 12345579 or equivalent).

7-24

Part E: Maintenance Record

After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading and who performed the service in the boxes provided after the maintenance interval. Any additional information from “Owner Checks and Services” or

“Periodic Maintenance” can be added on the following record pages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.

Your owner information portfolio is a convenient place to store them.

DATE

ODOMETER

READING

Maintenance Record

SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED

7-25

DATE

ODOMETER

READING

Maintenance Record

SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED

7-26

Section 8 Customer Assistance Information

8

-

2

8

-

3

8

-

3

8

-

5

8

-

5

8

-

7

8

-

8

8

-

9

Here you will find out how to contact Pontiac if you need assistance. This section also tells you how to obtain service publications and how to report any safety defects.

Pontiac Cares

What Makes Up Pontiac Cares?

Customer Satisfaction Procedure

Customer Assistance for Text Telephone

(TTY) Users

Customer Assistance Offices

GM Mobility Program for Persons with Disabilities

Pontiac Roadside Assistance Program

Canadian Roadside Assistance

8

-

10 Courtesy Transportation

8

-

11 Warranty Information

8

-

12 Reporting Safety Defects to the United

States Government

8

-

12 Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government

8

-

13 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors

8

-

13 Ordering Service and Owner Publications in Canada

8-

8-1

Pontiac Cares

With PONTIAC CARES, you are never more than a phone call away from having your concern taken care of.

8-2

The PONTIAC CARES philosophy and elements are designed to make you realize that Pontiac recognizes you as a valuable customer, appreciates your purchase decision, and is dedicated to taking care of the most important person ... YOU! PONTIAC CARES is: A valuable feature that comes with every Pontiac, a feature that offers a multitude of benefits that can give you safety, security, comfort and convenience.

What Makes Up Pontiac Cares?

D A 3 year/36,000 mile (60 000 km)

Bumper

to

-

Bumper Warranty

D Customer Assistance

D Roadside Assistance

D Courtesy Transportation

All of these elements combine to make your driving experience an enjoyable one and are discussed in greater detail in your owner’s manual. Pontiac is focusing on the changing needs of our customers and is committed to giving you an exceptional level of customer care throughout your ownership experience. Our goal is to create total customer enthusiasm in our product and our services and make you the most satisfied customer in the world.

Customer Satisfaction Procedure

8-3

Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your dealer and to Pontiac. Normally, any concerns with the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service departments.

Sometimes, however, despite the best intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE -- Discuss your concern with a member of dealership management. Normally, concerns can be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the general manager.

STEP TWO -- If after contacting a member of dealership management, it appears your concern cannot be resolved by the dealership without further help, contact the Pontiac Customer Assistance Center by calling

1-800-762-2737. In Canada, contact GM of Canada

Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling

1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have the following information available to give the Customer

Assistance Representative:

D Vehicle Identification Number (This is available from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel and visible through the windshield.)

D Dealership name and location

D Vehicle delivery date and present mileage

When contacting Pontiac, please remember that your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you have a concern.

STEP THREE -- Both General Motors and your dealer are committed to making sure you are completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, file with the

GM/BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to your

Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle

Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).

8-4

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Although you are required to resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to filing any court action, use of the program is free of charge and your case will generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.

You may contact the BBB using the toll

free telephone number or write them at the following address:

BBB Auto Line

Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.

4200 Wilson Boulevard

Suite 800

Arlington, VA 22203

-

1804

Telephone: 1

-

800

-

955

-

5100

This program is available in all 50 states and the District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age, mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves the right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue its participation in this program.

Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users

To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or speech

impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),

Pontiac has TTY equipment available at its Customer

Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate with

Pontiac by dialing: 1

-

800

-

833

-

PONT (7668).

(TTY users in Canada can dial 1

-

800

-

263

-

3830.)

Customer Assistance Offices

Pontiac encourages customers to call the toll-free number for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes to write to

Pontiac, the letter should be addressed to Pontiac’s

Customer Assistance Center.

United States

Pontiac-GMC Customer Assistance Center

P.O. Box 436008

Pontiac, MI 48343-6008

1-800-762-2737 or

1-800-833-7668 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))

Roadside Assistance: 1-800-ROADSIDE (762-3743)

8-5

Canada

General Motors of Canada Limited

Customer Communication Centre, 163-005

1908 Colonel Sam Drive

Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

1-800-263-3777 (English)

1-800-263-7854 (French)

1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))

Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

All Overseas Locations

GMODC

-

Customer Communication Centre

169-007

1908 Colonel Sam Drive

Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Telephone: 905-644-4112

Fax: 905-644-4866

Caribbean Numbers

1-800-496-9992 (English) Puerto Rico

1-800-496-9993 (Spanish) Puerto Rico

1-800-751-4135 (English) Dominican Republic

1-800-751-4136 (Spanish) Dominican Republic

1-800-496-9994 U.S. Virgin Islands

1-800-389-0009 Bahamas

1-800-534-0122 Bermuda, Barbados, Antigua & B.V.I.

If toll free service is not available in the Caribbean, call Puerto Rico 1-787-763-1315.

8-6

GM Mobility Program for Persons with Disabilities

This program, available to qualified applicants, can reimburse you up to $1,000 toward aftermarket driver or passenger adaptive equipment you may require for your vehicle (hand controls, wheelchair/scooter lifts, etc.).

This program can also provide you with free resource information, such as area driver assessment centers and mobility equipment installers. The program is available for a limited period of time from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. See your dealer for more details or call the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1

Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1

-

800

-

323

-

9935.

-

800

-

833

-

9935.

GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call

1

-

800

-

GM

-

DRIVE (463

-

7483) for details. When calling from outside Canada, please dial 1

-

905

-

644

-

3063.

All TTY users call 1

-

800

-

263

-

3830.

8-7

Pontiac Roadside Assistance Program

Security While You Travel

1

-

800

-

ROADSIDE (1

-

800

-

762

-

3743)

As the proud owner of a new Pontiac vehicle, you are automatically enrolled in the Pontiac Roadside

Assistance program. This value

added service is intended to provide you with peace of mind as you drive in the city or travel the open road.

Pontiac’s Roadside Assistance toll

free number is staffed by a team of technically trained advisors, who are available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.

We take anxiety out of uncertain situations by providing minor repair information over the phone or making arrangements to tow your vehicle to the nearest

Pontiac dealer.

We will provide the following services for

3 years/36,000 miles (60 000 km), at no expense to you:

D Fuel delivery

D Keys locked in vehicle

D Tow to nearest dealership for warranty service

D Change a flat tire

D Jump starts

D Courtesy Transportation -- See Courtesy

Transportation section for details

8-8

We have quick, easy access to telephone numbers of the following additional services depending on your needs:

D Hotels

D Glass replacement

D Tire repair facilities

D Rental vehicle or taxis

D Airports or train stations

D Police, fire department or hospitals

In many instances, mechanical failures are covered under Pontiac’s comprehensive warranty. However, when other services are utilized, our advisors will explain any payment obligations you might incur.

For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please provide the following information to give the advisor:

D Location of vehicle

D Telephone number of your location

D Vehicle model, year and color

D Mileage of vehicle

D Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

D Vehicle license plate number

Pontiac reserves the right to limit services or reimbursement to an owner or driver when, in Pontiac’s judgement, the claims become excessive in frequency or type of occurrence.

While we hope you never have the occasion to use our service, it is added security while traveling for you and your family. Remember, we’re only a phone call away.

Pontiac Roadside Assistance

--

1

-

800

-

ROADSIDE or 1

-

800

-

762

-

3743.

Canadian Roadside Assistance

Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive

Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the separate brochure provided by the dealer or call

1

-

800

-

268

-

6800 for emergency services.

8-9

Courtesy Transportation

Pontiac has always exemplified quality and value in its offering of motor vehicles. To enhance your ownership experience, we and our participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer support program for new vehicles.

The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retail purchase/lease customers in conjunction with the

Bumper

to

-

Bumper coverage provided by the New

Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation options are available when warranty repairs are required. This will reduce your inconvenience during warranty repairs.

Plan Ahead When Possible

When your vehicle requires warranty service, you should contact your dealer and request an appointment.

By scheduling a service appointment and advising your service consultant of your transportation needs, your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience. If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department immediately, keep driving it until it can be scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is safety

related.

If it is, please call your dealership, let them know this, and ask for instructions.

If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle off for service, you are urged to do so as early in the work day as possible to allow for same day repair.

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generally be completed while you wait. However, if you are unable to wait Pontiac helps minimize your inconvenience by providing several transportation options. Depending on the circumstances, your dealer can offer you one of the following:

Shuttle Service

Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle service to get you to your destination with minimal interruption of your daily schedule. This includes a one way shuttle ride to a destination up to 10 miles from the dealership.

Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement

If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, reimbursement up to $30 per day (five days maximum) may be available for the use of public transportation such as taxi or bus. In addition, should you arrange transportation through a friend or relative, reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses up to

$10 per day (five day maximum) may be available.

Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by original receipts.

8-10

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

When your vehicle is unavailable due to overnight warranty repairs, your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle you obtained, at actual cost, up to a maximum of

$30.00 per day supported by receipts. This requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement and meet state, local and rental vehicle provider requirements.

Requirements vary and may include minimum age requirements, insurance coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage charges and may also be responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage or rental usage beyond the completion of the repair.

Generally it is not possible to provide a like

vehicle as a courtesy rental.

Additional Program Information

Courtesy Transportation is available during the

Bumper

to

-

Bumper warranty coverage period, but it is not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty and Owner Assistance

Information” furnished with each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage information.

Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating dealers and all program options, such as shuttle service, may not be available at every dealer.

Please contact your dealer for specific information about availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.

Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during the

Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General

Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty, alternative transportation may be available under the

Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult your dealer for details.

General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify, change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein at its sole discretion.

Warranty Information

Your vehicle comes with a separate warranty booklet that contains detailed warranty information.

8-11

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

TO THE UNITED STATES

GOVERNMENT

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic

Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying General Motors.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer or

General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety

Hotline toll

free at 1

-

800

-

424

-

9393 (or 366

-

0123 in the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:

NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation

Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the hotline.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

TO THE CANADIAN

GOVERNMENT

If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should immediately notify

Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General

Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:

Transport Canada

330 Sparks Street

Tower C

Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5

8-12

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

TO GENERAL MOTORS

In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us. Please call us at 1–800–762-2737, or write:

Pontiac-GMC Customer Assistance Center

P.O. Box 436008

Pontiac, MI 48343-6008

In Canada, please call us at 1

-

800

-

263

-

3777 (English) or 1

-

800

-

263

-

7854 (French). Or, write:

General Motors of Canada Limited

Customer Communication Centre, 163-005

1908 Colonel Sam Drive

Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Ordering Service and Owner

Publications in Canada

Service manuals, owner’s manuals and other service literature are available for purchase for all current and past model General Motors vehicles.

The toll-free telephone number for ordering information in Canada is 1-800-668-5539.

8-13

2000 PONTIAC SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION

The following publications covering the operation and servicing of your vehicle can be purchased by filling out the Service Publication Order Form in this book and mailing it in with your check, money order, or credit card information to Helm, Incorporated (address below.)

CURRENT PUBLICATIONS FOR 2000 PONTIAC

SERVICE MANUALS

Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information on engines, transmission, axle, suspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $120.00

OWNER’S INFORMATION

Owner publications are written directly for Owners and intended to provide basic operational information about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include the Maintenance

Schedule for all models.

TRANSMISSION, TRANSAXLE, TRANSFER CASE

UNIT REPAIR MANUAL

This manual provides information on unit repair service procedures, adjustments and specifications for the

2000 GM transmissions, transaxles and transfer cases.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $50.00

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual and

Warranty Booklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $20.00

Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $15.00

SERVICE BULLETINS

Service Bulletins give technical service information needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks.

Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.

CURRENT & PAST MODEL ORDER FORMS

Service Publications are available for current and past model GM vehicles. To request an order form, please specify year and model name of the vehicle.

PLEASE COMPLETE THE ORDER FORM SHOWN ON

THE FOLLOWING PAGE AND MAIL TO:

Helm, Incorporated

S

P.O. Box 07130

S

Detroit, MI 48207

8-14

OR ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123

Monday-Friday 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only (VISA–MasterCard–Discover)

0

0

2

0

ORDER TOLL FREE

(NOTE: For Credit Card Holders Only)

1-800-551-4123

(Monday-Friday 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM EST)

FAX Orders Only 1-313-865-5927

Orders will be mailed within 10 days of receipt. Please allow adequate time for postal service. If further information is needed, write to the address shown below or call

1-800-551-4123. Material cannot be returned for credit without packing slip with return information within 30 days of delivery. On returns, a re-stocking fee may be applied against the original order.

ITEM DESCRIPTION

VEHICLE MODEL

NAME YEAR

QTY.

PRICE

EACH*

TOTAL

PRICE

2000 $120.00

Service Manual

Car & Light Truck

Transmission Unit Repair

2000 $50.00

Owner’s Manual In Portfolio 2000 $20.00

Owner’s Manual Without Portfolio 2000 $15.00

G

M

S

H

I

P

T

O

NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name, and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment should be sent.

Mail completed order form to:

HELM, INCORPORATED

S

P.O. Box 07130

S

Detroit, MI 48207

For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the above address for quotation.

(CUSTOMER’S NAME)

(STREET ADDRESS—NO P.O. BOX NUMBERS)

(CITY)

(ATTENTION)

DAYTIME TELEPHONE NO.

GM-PON-ORD99

(ZIP CODE) (STATE)

( )

AREA CODE

*(Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.)

P

A

Y

M

E

N

T

Check or Money

Order payable to

Helm, Inc. (USA funds only — do not send cash.)

MasterCard

VISA

Discover

Account

Number:

Expiration

Date mo/yr:

TOTAL MATERIAL

Michigan Purchasers add 6% sales tax

U.S. Order Processing

Canadian Postage

(See Note Below)

GRAND TOTAL

$6.00

Check here if your billing address is different from your shipping address shown.

CUSTOMER SIGNATURE

Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents

U.S. order processing.

advertisement

Download PDF

advertisement

Table of contents